Home

Ford 2011 Crown Victoria Automobile User Manual

1. 95 Customer Assistance 188 Ford Extended Service Plan 300 303 Getting assistance outside the U S and Canada 215 Getting roadside assistance 188 Getting the service VOU NEGA eead iea 211 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Index Ordering additional owner s literature 217 Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration POSTON scchece anaran ets 215 D Daytime running lamps see M S Kapari iran ez la ma 47 Defrost rear windoW 45 Dipstick automatic transmission AMG Skar ne TS 255 engine Y E 230 Driving under special conditions 186 through water 187 E Electronic message center 19 Emergencies roadside Jump starting 206 Emergency Flashers 189 Emission control system 251 ENENG 542 AM 265 CLEANING siscciseicesisnavissrdessicrses 220 Coglais ninenin 235 fail safe cooling 239 idle speedcontrol 233 lubrication specifications 262 refillcapacities 262 service points 228 229 starting after a collision 189 Engine block heater 176 ENSING gil sisman 230 327 Index change oil soon warning message center
2. 106 police and fleet vehicles 271 extension assembly 104 Power door locks T2 for adults sviss 100 102 104 Power mirrors an 67 for Children 123 lap Pelt sea seceteestecn da 101 Power point 65 aay Rear police 272 Occupant Classification j SENSON EE 97 Power steering 182 ing light and chi 105 fluid checking and adding 254 warning light and chime fluid refill capacity 262 Safety restraints LATCH Power Windows 66 anchols 132 R Safety seats for children 127 Safety Compliance Radio 26 28 31 36 Oo Certificationlabel 266 Rear window defroster 45 Scheduled Maintenance Guide Recommendations for Normal Scheduled attaching safety restraints for een el rr ata Le ill 61 ei e e AST 125 Should You Follow cc 306 RElayS samim 190 199 Seat belt extenders police 279 Remote entry system 76 Seats 87 illuminated m 79 S eee ir 5 unlocking doors 76 irae safety SCatS css scenciescses a opening thetrunk TT Mi ee Ee 89 panie alarm aaa a insandan TT m Ni a 94 replacement additional e ei i serer transmitters sensn 78 eavy duty police replacing the batteries
3. checking and adding GUDSTICKS sr esas iran filter specifications 232 261 recommendations refillcapacities Specifications Eventdatarecording Exhaust fumes wu F Fail safe cooling Fire suppression system POCE sas ssvecct sisdavccesgsee an 285 286 Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV 241 Floor Mats Fluid capacities Fog lamas presino nuce Puel A A EE calculating fuel ECONOMY 7 e 23 248 e 0g EDEM CAPACILY secesisdssevsssncctecertdssecadeaee choosing the right fuel detergentinfuel filling your vehicle withfuel 241 244 248 filter specifications 241 261 fuel pump shut off switch improving fuel economy octane rating 246 247 265 TOUR ez MEME YE Edr running outoffuel safety information relating to automotive fuels 241 Fuel flex fuel vehicle PEV Sissssssdsessseieaissave 241 246 247 328 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus BUSES e e 190 191 G Gas cap see Fuel cap 244 Gas mileage see Fuel economy 248 BESE mean aa sende 17 H Hazard flashers 189 Headlamps 46 AM NE sss ss
4. 77 o SecuriLock passive anti theft Roadside assistance e ii 188 SVSUCIN e 82 85 Servicing your vehicle 227 S Setting the clock AMFMsingleCD 30 Safety belts see Safety AM FM stereo 27 restraints 95 99 100 102 AM FM In dash 6 CD 39 104 105 O AMFMTapfOD 34 Safety Canopy 120 Spark plugs Safety defects reporting 217 218 specifications 261 265 330 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Specification chart Tubricaml eml Malak 262 Speedcontrol 69 Speedometer calibrated police 280 Starting a flex fuel vehicle 174 Starting your vehicle 172 174 JUMP starting setasion 206 Steering wheel CONOIS s nmesin enden 70 UHH es EE ena 64 Suspension heavy duty police 273 T Tilt steering wheel 64 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Tires Wheels and Loading 156 Police and fleet vehicles 214 ie EN Ee 141 142 199 alignment secere nte 149 GOLE e e el iri 145 CHANGING asia as seses dedesi 199 202 checking the pressure 145 M E LME Kasas erisim 143 label 22 maraz ean lasin ae 155 police vehicles 274 PEPIACING sss si amana 147 TOUTING sissssimen eksene semas n
5. Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine and engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities later in this chapter for more information Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application 232
6. No equipment will mount between the side of the front seat and the door trim to block deployment of the side airbag G J e Figure 1 1 9 5 inches 240 mm from center of airbag door 2 15 7 inches 400 mm from center of airbag door 3 28 5 inches 725 mm No objects should be placed between the airbags due to airbag variability 289 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Figure 2 1 30 5 inches 775 mm Cross section through center of vehicle passenger side shown 290 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Figure 3 1 23 6 inches 600 mm Front passenger compartment 2 17 inches 430 mm Front driver 291 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Figure 4 Gf equipped 1 8 inches 200 mm From out board side of seat 2 15 inches 880 mm Forward of seat back Figure 5 Gf equipped 3 27 5 inches 700 mm Up from SAB module 292 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Figure 6 1 Area on top of instrument panel Equipment must not interfere with driver visibility 2 The airbag door must be kept clear for deployment of airbag 3 Area in front of center console from bottom of ashtray
7. To adjust your mirrors 1 Rotate the control clockwise to adjust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place 67 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Heated outside mirrors Li if equipped Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice mist and fog when the rear window defrost is activated Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Fold away mirrors Fold the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space like an automatic car wash 4 POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS IF EGUIPPED The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stopped and the gearshift lever is in the P Park position Press and hold the rocker control to adjust accelerator and brake pedal e Press the righi side of the control to adjust the pedals toward you e Press the left side of the control to adjust the pedals away from you The adjustment allows for approximately 2 5 inches 65 mm of maximum travel WARNING Nev
8. Bme Yellow Yellow A Tan Brown soa Nawa Black Black Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by the brake pedal Remove the panel cover to access the fuses To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel cover 191 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies oH Jo UW _ if nina 27 O 25 O 23 O 21 D fp a 7 m O 1 0 Oo Jo 18 D 16 N 14 O 12 LL LERLE 9 7 gi 3 fol 43 O js A 6 O Ja ID The fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Location Rating 1 10A Ignition START Starter relay coil DTRS 2 7 5A Power mirrors Mirror switch Keypad switch Decklid switch Adjustable pedal switch Driver s door module Cluster 3 5A Ignition START Audio mute Police power distribution box PDB Police vehicles only 4 10A Lighting control module LCM switch illumination Autolamp sensor 3 LAN RG coe al Ignition ON ACC Wiper module 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating 10A Electronic automatic temperature ee control EATC module ve
9. FLOOR Distributes outside air through the floor vents MIX Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents floor vents and side window demisters GY Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and the side window demisters Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 7 position e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the air flow selector in OFF or MAX A C e Under normal weather conditions do not leave the air flow selector in MAX A C or OFF when the vehicle is parked This allows the vehicle to breathe using the outside air inlet vents e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield 42 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls e A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the air distribution setting that is selected During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C in the MAX A C position reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the vehicle s transmission into the park gear position to continue to receive cool air from your A C system To aid in side window defogging demist
10. To store a second personal code 1 Enter the factory set code 80 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 2 Within five seconds press 1 e 2 on the keypad to enter the programming mode 3 Enter a second personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 Press 3 e 4 to store the second personal code 5 The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm programming of the new code To store a third personal code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Within five seconds press 1 e 2 on the keypad to enter the programming mode 3 Enter a third personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 Press 5 e 6 or 7 8 or 9 e 0 or wait five seconds to store the third personal code 5 The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm programming of the new code Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code Erasing personal code To erase all of the personal entry codes programmed to a vehicle 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Press and release 1 e 2 within five seconds of step 1 3 Press and hold 1 e 2 for two seconds All of the vehicle doors will lock and then unlock to confirm erasure Unlocking the doors and releasing the trunk with the keyless entry
11. will flash If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode the horn does not sound and the TPMS indicator does not flash seek service from your authorized dealer 7 Train the TPMS sensors in the tires using the following TPMS reset sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise order 1 Left front tire Front driver s side 2 Right front tire Front passenger s side 3 Right rear tire Rear passenger s side 4 Left rear tire Rear driver s side 277 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty 8 Left front tire Place the TPMS reset tool against the left front tire where the tire meets the rim opposite from the valve stem 1 as shown This is where the sensor is located inside the rim Both tools the TPMS training tool part number 8C2Z 1A203 A or the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool part number 204 363 must be held against the tire sidewall opposite the valve stem as illustrated For the TPMS training tool the device should be held as illustrated with the arrow on the tool pointing towards the rim do not use the tool with the arrow pointing away from the rim as it may not activate the sensor 9 Press and release the activation button while holding either tool to the side wall until the horn sounds The horn will sound once within approximately 10 seconds to indicate the process was successful Note e If a double
12. 274 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Each road tire as well as the spare is equipped with a tire pressure sensor fastened to the inside of the rim opposite 180 degrees from the valve stem The signal from each transmitter is digitally unique to avoid interference from transmitters on other nearby vehicles Note The spare has a TPMS sensor but is not programmed to the module Changing tires with a TPMS Care should be taken avoid damaging the sensor and band during mounting or dismounting Please refer to the Crown Victoria Workshop Manual for the complete mount and dismount procedure This is critical as the procedure is different from previous model years due to the introduction of TPMS When a new tire wheel is installed When one of your road tires is replaced by a new tire wheel the TPMS sensor located in the new tire wheel needs to be trained to the vehicle TPMS system training tools An inexpensive TPMS training tool P N 8C2Z 1A203 A can be purchased from any Ford dealer for use by the driver or shop technician for training the system after maintenance has been performed that requires system training The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool P N 204 363 has more functionality and is designed primarily for shop use For either tool follow the training instructions as outlined below Note This procedure is also included in the Crown Victo
13. COOLANT CHANGE RECORD Engine coolant change coolant whichever comes first 324 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Engine coolant change log DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Scheduled Maintenance Guide Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace 325 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Index A ABS see Brakes 178 Accessory delay 66 Air cleaner filter 257 261 Air conditioning 43 Airsuspension 182 description 182 Airbag supplemental restraint SAY gl 1 Ge e ERA e 110 120 and child safety seats 112 description 110 120 GiSHOSAl asalak kamal Balm 122 driverairbag 113 121 indicator light 120 122 Operat OTe suss senesini 113 121 passenger airbag 113 1
14. R TNR 1 Adjust the seatback to an upright driving riding position 2 Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint 4 87 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide sleeve adjust release button and pushing down on the head restraint Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied To remove the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position 4 88 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the adjust release button and the unlock remove button then pull A up on the head restraint To reinstall the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks TR Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
15. s safety belt usages are monitored and either may activate the Belt Minder feature The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for approximately five minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occupant can still activate the Belt Minder feature The driver s and front The Belt Minder feature will not passenger s safety belts are activate buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position or less than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The driver s or front The Belt Minder feature is activated passenger s safety belt is not the safety belt warning light buckled when the vehicle has illuminates and the warning chime reached at least 3 mph sounds for six seconds every 5 km h and 1 2 minutes have 30 seconds repeating for elapsed since the ignition approximately five minutes or until switch has been turned to on the safety belts are buckled 106 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The driver s or front The Belt Minder feature is activated passenger s safety belt becomes the safety belt warning light unbuckled for approximately illuminates and the warning chime one minute while the vehicle is sounds for six seconds every traveling at least 3 mph 30 seconds repeating for 5 km h an
16. system To unlock the driver door enter either the factory set code or personal code each digit pressed within five seconds of prior digit The interior lamps will illuminate e To unlock all doors enter the factory set code or personal code driver door unlocks and press 3 e 4 within five seconds 81 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security e To release the trunk enter the factory set code or personal code driver door unlocks and press 5 e 6 within five seconds After the factory set code or personal code has been entered you can unlock all doors press 3 e 4 and release the trunk press 5 e 6 as long as the controls are pressed within five seconds of each other Locking doors with the keyless entry system It is not necessary to enter the factory set code prior to locking all doors To lock the doors press 7 e Sand press 9 e O at the same time Note The doors will not lock if the driver door is ajar Anti scan feature If the wrong code has been entered seven times 35 consecutive button presses the keypad will go into an anti scan mode This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad inactivity e pressing the control on the remote entry transmitter e the ignition is turned to the on position SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLock passive anti theft sy
17. Hours Miveace Scheduled Maintenance Guide DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace 321 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace 322 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Scheduled Maintenance Guide EXCEPTIONS In addition there are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule They are listed below Normal vehicle axle maintenance CA Rear axles and power take off PTO units containing synthetic lubricant and light duty trucks equipped with Ford design axles are lubricated for life These lubricants are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspe
18. Overdrive cancel switch ae Traction control switch PTT Noted S 28 7 5A Brake signal LCM brake O Z S imisa sinter ARS 30 2A Battery saver Police vehicles only Key in LCM Hazard out Police vehicles only equipped Police vehicles only K101 Full ISO relay Window relay Decklid Police vehicles only 194 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses WARNING To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 204 203 503 e 30 209 206 501 208 205 202 303 207 201 302 301 The high current fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits L
19. USA fus Lights each headlamp Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise and place the left edge of the high intensity area even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment 8 Locate the horizontal adjuster for i aS JA Vertical aim adjustment Grand Marquis only 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away Check your headlamp alignment at night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood 4 On the wall or screen you will observe an area of high intensity light The top of the high intensity area should touch the horizontal reference line if not the beam will need to be adjusted 50 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp Using a 4 mm wrench turn the adjuster
20. Under normal conditions the Traction Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle Extended use of other than the manufacturer s specified size tires on a Traction Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in effectiveness This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the on position unless brake pedal is pressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brake lamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter If the fuse is not blown perform the following procedure 1 Apply the parking brake turn the ignition to the accessory position 183 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving 2 Locate the access plug on the underside of the steering column cover 3 Remove the access plug using a flat head screwdriver Insert the screwdriver into the access hole nearest the steering wheel Then press and hold the override button using a flat head screwdriver Apply the brake pedal and shift the transmission into N Neutral while continuing to press the override button 4
21. and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing 6 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction your vehicle For U S only Gf equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See your SYNC supplement for more information Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver wa
22. even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash head restraints must be installed properly Adjusting the front manual seat if equipped WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips 89 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Lift handle to move seat forward or backward Pull lever up to adjust seatback WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Using the manual recline function if equipped WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving injuring people in a collision or sudden stop WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting i
23. if equipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly The heated seat control is located on the driver s or front passenger s door To operate the heated seats e Press the indicated side of the control for maximum heat e Press again to deactivate e Press the indicated side of the control for minimum heat e Press again to deactivate The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle While the ignition is in the on position activating the high or low heated seat switch enables heating mode When activated they will turn off automatically when the ignition is turned to the off posit
24. operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low WARNING Fail safe mode is for use during emergencies only Operate the vehicle in fail safe mode only as long as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs When in fail safe mode the vehicle will have limited power will not be able to maintain high speed operation and may completely shut down without warning potentially losing engine power power steering assist and power brake assist which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury 240 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Re start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible FUEL FILTER For fuel filter replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance informa
25. replacing bulbs 54 59 LATCHanchors 132 Lights warning and indicator 12 anti lock brakes ABS 179 Limited slip axle see Traction LOG e ea 183 Load WIS sacma siniri 162 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks AUtOlOCK RR aeee 72 elele oo 01 eee e RR YEN 74 LOOMS 2 ccs EM e erer e 72 Lubricant specifications 262 LUS NULS seans 205 Lumbar support seats 93 M Message center 19 20 english metric button 23 system check button 23 warning Messages 28 MITT OTS seske elisa 66 67 automatic dimming rearview MLELOL desene ala sai ei 67 TOO OMAY e ei 68 heated ss a lem Bi 68 side view mirrors power 67 Mobile media system Police and fleet vehicles 280 Motorcraft parts 226 241 261 O Octane rating 246 247 Oil see Engine oil 230 P Parking brake 180 Parts see Motorcraft pals me e 261 Passenger Occupant Classification Sensor 97 Pedals see Power adjustable foot pedals esi esaasmimsmie 68 Power adjustable foot pedals 68 329 Index Power distribution box see Safety restraints 95 99 102 FUSES asena elemesi ae kemik 104 105 Power distribution connector Belt Minder
26. the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the Service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the Service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance MM testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on board diagnostics system OBD II has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Powertrain malfunction indicator if equipped Pw Iluminates when a powertrain fault has been detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Check fuel cap if equipped Illuminates when the fuel cap may A not be properly installed Continued driving with this light on may cause the Service engin
27. vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door TRAILER TOWING Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towing vehicle Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km Note Long wheel based vehicles are NOT rated for towing Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle s engine transmission brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components carefully after towing Your loaded trailer should weigh no more than 1 500 Ib 680 kg Do not exceed the GVWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The GCW of your vehicle and trailer should not exceed 6 600 Ib 2 993 kg WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle Contact your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance Hitches Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper use a load carrying hitch You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 15 of the total weight of
28. 0 047 inch 1 32 1 42 mm 1 04 1 20 mm 265 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO i DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG that a Safety Comp liance FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXL Certification Label be affixed to a XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH 5 x XXXX KXXXXXX TIRES XXXXIXXXXXXX TIRES vehicle and prescribe where the OXX R OOK RIMS Safety Compliance Certification AT XXX KPAX CPSLGOLD J ATXXK KPaIXX PSI COLD Label may be located The Safety THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR li ification Labela VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN Compliance Certification abe 1S EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE located on the structure B Pillar wo ae ee by the trailing edge of the driver s door or the edge of the driver s E door EXT PNT OX RCXX DSO WB BRK TINTTR PPS R TANE TR SPR XXXXK XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number is located on the driver side instrument panel Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 266 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing US
29. B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc 153 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are a 3 described below 0211447707 Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation lim
30. MIX recycled coolant and new unused coolant together in the vehicle Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine s cooling system The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and distilled water to the FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflo
31. The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for damage WARNING The use of tire sealants may damage your tire pressure monitoring system TPMS and should not be used However if you must use a sealant the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer WARNING Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size and type as the road ti
32. USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor fastened to the inside rim of the wheel The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed The pressure sensor is located opposite 180 degrees from the valve stem Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 157 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Understan
33. When installing a child safety seat e Review and follow the information presented in the Azrbag supplemental restraint system SRS section in this chapter e Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision 127 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat When installing a child safety seat with combination lap shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seat
34. a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest Lap belts Adjusting the front center seat lap belt if equipped WARNING The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips not across the waist The lap belt does not adjust Ww automatically Insert the tongue into i the correct buckle the buckle 7 closest to the direction the tongue is coming from To lengthen the belt turn the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull across your lap until it reaches the buckle To tighten the belt pull the loose end of the belt through the tongue until it fits snugly across the hips 101 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Shorten and fasten the belt when not in use Safety belt locking modes The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts The driver safety belt has the first locking mode and the front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows Vehicle sensitive mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes s
35. access is via two studs contained in an enclosure mounted in the trunk on the right side fender support The terminal with the red wires is the battery positive and the terminal with the black wire is the ground Remove both fuses in the front PDB before removing the cover to the rear power point Ensure load devices can be turned off and are switched off when reinserting fuses 272 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty WARNING Under no circumstance should the rear power point cover be removed without first pulling the two fuses in the front power distribution box Removing cover without pulling fuses could result in an electrical hazard and result in personal injury Shut off load devices before inserting fuses Headlight flashers wig wags police An interfacing connector is provided on the headlight circuit for use of the headlights as alternating flashers wig wags The connector is located in front of the radiator A protective cap is attached to prevent contaminants from entering the connector when a wig wag module is not installed When installing a headlight flasher wig wag module remove the connector and tape it to the wigwag module harness This will ensure that the cap is available to be reattached if the wig wag module is removed For additional information refer to the Crown Victoria Wiring Diagram Manual If your vehicle is equipped with one of the optiona
36. after the hearing Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB You are not bound by the decision and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute and decision are admissible in the court action Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford is then bound by the decision and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 214 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Compa
37. an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb performance Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector Never turn the headlamps on with the bulb removed 59 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing front parking cornering turn signal lamp bulbs To remove the parking cornering turn signal lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position then open the hood 2 Remove the three pin type retainers and the radiator shield 3 Remove two nuts from the back side of the lamp assembly then pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle 4 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp assembly 5 Carefully pull bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb 6 To install reverse the order of the removal procedure Note The parking lamp turn signal bulbs should not be removed from the lamp until just before a replacement bulb is installed Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb performance Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector Never turn the lamps on with the bulb removed Replacing tail brake turn signal lamp bulbs The tail lamp the brake lamp and the turn signal lamp bulbs are located in the tail lamp assembly Follow the same steps to replace either bulb 60 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Gu
38. any configuration of police equipment mounting that places objects in the airbag deployment path Equipment mounted or placed in the deployment path area of an airbag will reduce the effectiveness of the airbag damage the airbag and potentially damage or dislodge the equipment Further such items could become projectiles in the event of an airbag deployment WARNING Always use safety belts with the airbag supplemental restraint system There are four very important reasons to always use seat belts with the airbag system Safety belts e help restrain the occupant to increase the effectiveness of the airbag when it inflates e reduce the risk of injury in rollover side or rear impact accidents for which airbags are not designed to inflate e reduce the risk of injury in frontal collisions that are not severe enough to activate the airbag e reduce the risk of passengers being thrown from the vehicle SOME COMMON POLICE QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS ABOUT AIRBAGS Will there be any way to special order police vehicles without the airbag systems No Based on the federal law FMVSS 208 after August 31 1993 the Original Equipment Manufacturers OEMs will not be able to sell passenger cars that do not contain passive restraint systems Can the installation of push bumpers on the front end of the vehicle affect the deployment of an airbag Different push bumper designs may each have different deformation characteristics in a crash s
39. assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon O indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon K indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 252 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened See Fuel filler cap in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the service engine soon CA indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emission
40. can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C However if fluid is added at this time an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature 50 F 95 F 10 C 35 C High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter 256 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint 250 ml increments through the filler tube until the level is correct If an overfill occurs excess fluid should be removed by an authorized dealer An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible d
41. caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning material such as cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the engine off 1 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly Working with the engine on 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 227 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications OPENING THE HOOD 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the instrument panel 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located under the front of the hood 3 Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open 1 Brake fluid reservoir 6 Engine coolant reservoir 2 Engine oil dipstick 7 Battery 8 Power distribution box 3 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 9 Engine oil filler cap 4 Air filter assembly 10 Automatic transmission fluid 5 Power steering fluid reservoir dipst
42. cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers Windshield wiper washer features When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight and the headlamp control is in the autolamp position the exterior lamps will turn on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off 63 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls TILT STEERING WHEEL To adjust the steering wheel 1 Pull and hold the steering wheel release control toward you 2 Move the steering wheel up or down until you find the desired location 3 Release the steering wheel release control This will lock the steering wheel in position WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamps Slide on rod feature if equipped Rotate the visor towards the side window and extend it rearward for additional sunlight coverage Note To stow the visor back into the headliner visor must be retracted before moving it back towards the windshield 64 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls CENTER CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a varie
43. child safety seats and they move forward during pre crash braking The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are aoe safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front WARNING Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active air bag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front passenger airbag and passenger seat mounted side airbag The system is designed to help protect small child size occupants from frontal airbag deployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to proper child seating or restraint usage recommendations Even with this technology parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag when the passenger seat is empty The sensor turns off the passenger seat mounted side airbag when the seat is empty and the safety belt is unbuckled or buckled When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has turned off the passenger s frontal airbag th
44. control will not erase previous set speed 69 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Resuming a set speed Press and release RESUME This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed Increasing speed while using speed control To set a higher speed e Press and hold SET until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap up function Press and release SET to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed then press and release SET Reducing speed while using speed control To reduce a set speed e Press and hold SET until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap down function Press and release SET to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached then press and release SET Turning off speed control To turn off the speed control press OFF or turn off the ignition Note When you turn the speed control or the ignition off your speed control set speed memory is erased STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED Audio control features NEXT Press to select the next preset radio station tape selection or CD track VOL Volume Press to increase or decrease the volume 70 2011 Crown Victori
45. could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle The remote entry system allows you to lock or unlock all vehicle doors without a key Note The remote entry features operate with the ignition in any position except in the on position when the transmission is in any gear other than P Park or N Neutral If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL remote entry transmitters with you to the authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem Unlocking the doors 1 Press and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior lamps will illuminate 2 Press D and release again within five seconds to unlock all the doors Locking the doors amp Press once to lock all the doors Upon the first press the doors will lock and the parklamps taillamps will flash once 76 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Press A again within three seconds to receive confirmation that the vehicle was successfully locked Note If all vehicle doors and the trunk are closed upon the second press of the the horn will chirp once and the parklamps taillamps will flash once to confirm the successful locking Upon the second press of the A if any door or the trunk is not securely closed the horn will chirp twice to warn that succe
46. excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners 233 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Battery relearn Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance Flexible fuel vehicles FFV must also relearn the ethanol content of the fuel for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park turn off all accessories a
47. fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Transporting children Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their age height and weight All children are shaped differently The child height age and weight thresholds provided are recommendations or the minimum requirements of law The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA provides education and 126 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrain
48. fus Locks and Security The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the last door is closed or after 10 minutes if the last door is left open SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED With the keyless entry keypad you can 1 2 34 6 6 7 8 0 0 e lock or unlock the vehicle doors without using the key e open the trunk See also Remote entry system in this chapter for more information Your vehicle has a factory set 5 digit code that operates the keyless entry system You can also program your own 5 digit personal entry code The factory set code is located e On the owner s wallet card in the glove compartment or e at your dealer When using the keyless entry keypad press the middle of each button in order to ensure a good activation Programming a personal entry code You can program up to three personal codes to unlock your vehicle These codes do not replace the permanent code that the authorized dealer gave you To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code Note The keypad and the interior lamps will illuminate when pressed 2 Within five seconds press 1 e 2 on the keypad to enter the programming mode 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 Press 1 e 2 to store the first personal code 5 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm programming of the new code
49. horn chirp is heard repeat the procedure If a single horn chirp is not heard move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least a Y turn and repeat the procedure starting with Step 1 e If the horn does not sound while attempting to reset any wheel seek service from your authorized dealer 278 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty 10 Perform Steps 8 and 9 on the right front tire right rear tire and finally the left rear tire Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained left rear tire Turn the ignition to off If two short horn beeps are heard the reset procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the ignition is turned to off seek assistance from your authorized dealer Brakes police The police vehicle is equipped with heavy duty front disc brake pads to meet the varying demands of different police service for fade resistance and other performance requirements The police vehicle has standard anti lock brakes and may be equipped with traction control Brake fluid maintenance Police pursuits involving hard braking result in very high temperatures in the brake system including the brake fluid Over time repeated exposure to high brake temperatures can degrade brake fluid potentially reducing its boiling point A lower boiling point could cause long brake pedal travel a
50. in high speed rear end collisions Carry with caution These items will require special packing or mounting consideration and possibly use of the Trunk Pack as an additional level of safety Examples include with proposed orientation fire extinguisher fixed lug wrench 4 point fixed vertical rolotape measuring wheel fixed vertical safety flares lateral orientation in a container stop stick lateral mount on deck lid inner panel shovel lateral place at rear of trunk shotgun and rifle lateral store in case baton lateral place at rear of trunk ammunition container Flares should be placed in a protective storage container preferably soft sided plastic Flares with spikes attached should be laterally oriented in the trunk area 283 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty 1 Spare tire special considerations The safest location for the spare tire jack and lug wrench is the production location on the forward package shelf above the rear axle If unable to mount there the next safest location for the spare tire is mounted vertically inside the Trunk Pack using the J bolt attachment device provided with the Trunk Pack The jack and lug wrench should be stored in the rearward compartment of the Trunk Pack 2 Electronic Equipment The safest location for the electronic equipment is on the trunk forward package shelf Some equipm
51. key is turned on If the diagnostic lamp stays on refer to the appropriate sections of the Ford service manual for further diagnostic and service procedures The system is active any time the key or engine is turned on following the diagnostic check The system has been designed and tested to withstand a 75 mph 120 km h 50 off set rear impact by Taurus sized vehicle However in some crashes including very high energy crashes the fire suppression system could be so damaged by the crash forces that it cannot deploy Like any vehicle component the fire suppression system cannot withstand any and all crashes No vehicle can eliminate the risk of fires You should not consider the vehicle fireproof because it is equipped with a fire suppression system Ballistic door panels if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with ballistic door panels on one or both of the front doors Doors equipped with a ballistic panel are marked with a sticker on the interior door trim panel above the door handle indicating BALLISTIC PANEL Otherwise doors with ballistic panels are visually indistinguishable from standard doors The ballistic panels are designed to act as a shield for the officer at the scene of an altercation The door panels meet National Institute of Justice NIJ Level III protection requirements NIJ is the research development and evaluation agency within the U S Department of Justice The panels 286 2011 Crown Vi
52. lug wrench 5 Replace the flat tire wheel assembly with the spare tire wheel assembly making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 204 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 6 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 7 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification 8 Install any wheel covers ornaments or hub caps Make sure they are snapped in place 9 Put flat tire jack and lug wrench away 10 Turn on the air suspension switch if equipped WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal etc Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque ft lb Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are se
53. make full throttle starts e Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades e Use a lower gear to eliminate excessive shifting and assist in transmission cooling For additional information refer to Awtomatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter e Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached anticipate stops and brake gradually 169 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to Special operating conditions in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter Trailer towing tips e Practice turning stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles e To aid in engine transmission cooling and A C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic place the gearshift lever in P Park e After you have traveled 50 miles 80 km thoroughly check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts e If you are driving down a long or steep hill shift to a lower gear Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather hilly
54. mode In radio and tape mode the CD icon will appear in the display if a CD is loaded into the system 19 SAT Your system may be oe equipped with Satellite Ready capability The kit to enable the Satellite reception is available through your dealer Detailed satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit Check with your authorized dealer for availability 35 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 20 On Off Volume Press to turn on off turn to adjust the volume levels Note With the ignition turned off you may press the volume control to momentarily view the clock AM FM Premium sound satellite compatible Stereo In dash Six CD sound system if equipped gelin sar SGAN lt SEEK gt lt Tune caT gt 2 E E OL Te 5174 Ie we lt 7 Q WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws 1 CD slot To insert a CD press LOAD Wait to insert a CD until the system displays LOAD CD When the system is ready insert a CD label side up 36 2011 C
55. of music format Classic Country Info Jazz Oldies R amp B Religious Rock Soft Top 40 With RDS ON press MENU until the program type menu is displayed One of the various program types will appear Press 4 SEL TEXT gt to scroll through music types Press SEEK or SCAN to search for a station playing the requested music category Show TYPE Selects between displaying the station s call letters or music format when RDS is enabled Press and hold MENU until SHOW XX appears in the display Press lt q SEL TEXT gt to select NAME or TYPE Compression Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press MENU repeatedly until compression status is displayed Press 4 SEL TEXT gt control to enable the compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed Press lt q SEL TEXT p control again to disable the feature when COMPRESS ON is displayed When activated the compression icon will appear in the display Occupancy mode Available only on Premium sound audios Press MENU repeatedly until occupancy mode appears in the display Press lt Q SEL TEXT P gt to select ALL SEATS DRIVERS SEATS or REAR SEATS occupancy mode Autoset Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Press MENU repeatedly until AUTOSET appears in the display Press gt 33 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing
56. off position 2 Gheck the fuel system for leaks 3 If no fuel leak is apparent reset the fuel pump shut off switch by pressing the reset button 4 Turn the ignition to the on position Pause for a few seconds and return the key to the off position 5 Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate 15 fuses before replacing any electrical components 190 Ol Ol 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse Mini Standard Maxi Cartridge Fuse link maxi rating fuses fuses fuses cartridge SA Grey Grey 3A Violet Violet 4A Pik Pink A Tan Tan 75A Brown Brown ica Rea ka 15A Blue Bue 25A Natural Natural 30A Green Green Green Pink Pink 40A Orange Green Green A Red Red Red 604
57. one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects placed on the seat cushion For most objects that are in the front passenger seat the passenger airbag will be disabled Even though the passenger airbag is disabled the pass airbag off lamp may or may not be illuminated according to the table below 117 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints gt Pass Airbag Off 7 Small i e three ring Unlit Disabled binder small purse bottled water Medium i e heavy Lit Disabled briefcase fully packed luggage Empty seat or small Lit Disabled to medium object with safety belt buckled If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect check for the following e Objects lodged underneath the seat e Objects between the seat cushion and the center console if equipped e Objects hanging off the seat back e Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket if equipped e Objects placed on the occupant s lap e Cargo interference with the s
58. position but only if doing so will not interfere with driving the vehicle This arrangement provides lap and shoulder belt and airbag protection for adult occupants and an attachment method for a child restraint If the child seat interferes with driving the vehicle and the child restraint is forward facing the child may be restrained in the passenger seat Move the seat as far rearward as possible to minimize the likelihood of interaction with the front passenger airbag Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts Ensure the child is properly restrained in an appropriate child seat or with the use of a booster How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Driver and passenger airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration 113 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restrai
59. rear seating positions than in a front seating position Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X LATCH LATCH lower lower Restraint Child anchors anchors Type Rear facing child seat Forward facing child seat Forward facing child seat WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat 125 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly
60. remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b You are also required to use BBB AUTO 213 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson Moss Warranty Act 15 U S C sec 2301 et seq If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b or the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation and if your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision
61. replacement If vehicle is registered in California the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this main tenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life Ford Motor Company however urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified inter vals and to record all vehicle service Hot climate oil change intervals If operating conditions are normal and you drive your Ford Lincoln or Mercury vehicle under typical everyday conditions and you are using an API performance category oil of SL or later for example SM etc then you can follow the 7 500 mile 12 000 km normal service oil change intervals schedule Vehicles operating in the Middle East North Africa Sub Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates must follow the oil change interval of 3 000 mile 5 000 km if the owner is using oils defined by the American Petroleum Institute API performance category of API SK or earlier for ex ample SJ efc Engine air filter amp cabin air filter replacement Engine air filter and cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure fo dusty and dirty conditions Vehicles operated in these conditions will require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter 323 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide
62. setting Press MENU to access and use A SEL p to adjust the volume setting The level will appear in the display Setting the clock Press MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is displayed Press lt SEL gt to manually decrease increase the hours minutes Press MENU again to disengage clock mode Note The menu selections will remain in the display for approximately 10 seconds at which time the display will return to the previous mode You may also exit the menu options by pressing any other audio control 10 Memory presets To set a Cle station Select frequency band tune to a station press and hold a preset button until sound returns 11 On Off Volume Press to turn on off turn to adjust the volume levels Note With the ignition turned off you may press the volume control to momentarily view the clock 12 CD Press to enter CD mode if a CD is already present in the system In radio mode the CD icon will appear in the display if a CD is loaded into the system 13 AM Press to select the AM frequency CEN 30 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 14 FM Press to select the FM frequency Press repeatedly to switch between FM1 and FM2 15 SHUF Shuffle Press to play E all tracks on the current CD in E random order Press again to stop 16 SCAN Press SCAN to hear a 7 brief sampling of radio stations or e CD tracks Press again to stop Pr
63. spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water e Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Industrial strength heavy duty cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engi
64. system warning light and back up tone e The electrical wiring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor front passenger sensing system and indicator lights How does the Personal Safety System work The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the Restraints control module RCM During a crash the RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and or either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the Personal Safety System determined the accident conditions crash severity belt usage etc were not appropriate to activate these safety devices Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints The dual stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag inflation energy A lower less forceful energy level is provided for
65. the occupants to fasten their safety belts Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position The driver s safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus The safety belt warning light illuminates 1 2 minutes and the warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off 105 Seating and Safety Restraints Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning light in the instrument cluster when the driver s and front passenger s safety belt is unbuckled The Belt Minder feature uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activating the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system Both the driver s and passenger
66. then press amp SEL TEXT P gt to shift 4 sound to the left right speakers 37 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems FADE Press FADE then press lt q SEL TEXT gt to shift sound to the rear front speakers 8 SEL TEXT Use with Bass Treble Balance Fade and other menu functions TEXT TEXT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio Your system may be equipped with Satellite ready capability The kit to enable Satellite reception is available through your dealer Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit Check with your authorized dealer for availability 9 MENU Press MENU repeatedly ve to access RDS ON OFF Use lt Q SEL TEXT P gt to switch RDS ON OFF Press MENU again to access Program type mode or Show Type mode MENU must be pressed within 10 seconds to proceed to the next RDS mode The Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC recommend that FM radio broadcasters use RDS technology to transmit information FM radio stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDS technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired 4 SEL TEXT P FIND Program type Allows you to search RDS equipped stations for a certain category of music format Classic Country Info Jazz Oldies R amp B Religious Rock Soft Top 40 W
67. to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light will either e flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not N illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Seat mounted side airbag system 40 WARNING Do not place objects or mount eguipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag SRS its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag Contact your authorized de
68. to top of instrument panel see Figure 2 for dimensions 4 11 inches 279 mm width horizontally centered on ashtray door 293 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Figure 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Area on top of instrument panel Area in front of center console from tunnel up to instrument panel Prisoner screen 10 inches 254 mm Area on tunnel between seats Height 8 5 inches 216 mm 12 inches 805 mm Area on tunnel beneath center console Tunnel 10 Depth 1 5 inches 88 mm 294 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Figure 8 1 Area on top of instrument panel Equipment must not interfere with driver visibility 2 Area on tunnel between seats 3 9 inches 229 mm 4 12 inches 805 mm IMPORTANT AIRBAG DOS AND DON TS WARNING Do not attempt to tamper with disconnect or deactivate the airbag system Tampering with an airbag system could cause the bag to inflate or become inoperative The airbag system should not be disconnected or deactivated WARNING Do not mount or place any objects in the deployment path of an airbag 295 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Airbags must be allowed to fully deploy without restriction The deployment of airbags is not compatible with
69. upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Child restraint and safety belt maintenance Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Refer to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly or c
70. vehicle regardless of transmission powertrain configuration can be flat towed all wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward direction e Place the transmission in N Neutral Refer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the gear shift lever into N Neutral e Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 km 210 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home
71. vehicle is flex fuel capable it is designed to use Fuel Ethanol Ed75 Ed85 Regular unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two fuels Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and your warranty may be invalidated It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85 If you do switch fuels it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible at least half a tank Do not add less than five gallons 18 9L when refueling You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration If you exclusively use E85 fuel it is recommended to fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline at each scheduled oil change Fuel quality Unleaded gasoline engines If you experience starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start try a different brand of Regular unleaded gasoline Premium unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced If the problems persist see your authorized dealer FFV engines If you experience starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start try a different brand of E85 fuel If the driveability problems continue fill the vehicle with regular unleaded gasoline and drive
72. vehicle normally until gasoline is used See your authorized dealer if the problem persists Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane 247 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal e Normally adding 1 gallon 8 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of
73. when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www genuineservice com e U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code e Owner Guides e Maintenance Schedules e Recalls e Ford Extended Service Plans e Ford Genuine Accessories 211 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance e Service specials and promotions In Canada Mailing address Ford vehicles Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Mailing address Lincoln vehicles Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Additional assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved con
74. you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed Cassette player care e Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less e Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole and turning the hub e Remove loose labels before inserting tapes e Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat humidity or cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing 40 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after 10 12 hours of play to maintain good sound operation Don t e Expose tapes to direct sunlight extreme humidity heat or cold e Leave tapesin the cassette player for a long time when not being played CD CD player care Do e Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface e Inspect discs before playing Clean only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out Don t e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Clean using a circular motion CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Dirty warped or damaged CDs irregular shaped CDs CD
75. your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life
76. 140 mph and kilometer per hour 0 222 km h readings The speedometer head assembly accuracy is 2 mph 3 km h over the entire range at 70 F 21 C The certified calibration applies to the head assembly only and does not apply to the indicated speed of the system which is affected by variations in vehicle loading tire inflation pressures tire rolling radii and driveline ratios Red White map light police if equipped The police vehicle may be equipped with a red white map light located in the headliner between the driver and front seat passenger A three position switch provides either white or night vision red options When the rocker switch is in the center position the lamp is off Pressing the left side white dot makes the lamp operate in the white light mode Pressing the right side red dot makes the lamp operate in the night vision red mode Mobile communication systems The Federal Communications Commission regulates the use of mobile communication systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters If you install this equipment in your vehicle you should comply with those rules and a qualified technician should install the equipment Ford Motor Company vehicles are in compliance with FCC regulations CFR 47 Part 15 and SAE J551d for radiated electromagnetic emissions Mobile communication systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they
77. 149 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Rear wheel drive RWD vehicles Four wheel drive 4WD All wheel drive AWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram LL ANANN Z if LL ANNAS Z TL NN SANA ANNANN Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall 150 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels
78. 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery
79. 21 sideairba8 120 Airbags police 288 Alternator 271 Antifreeze see Engine coolani 285 Anti lock brake system seeBrakes 178 179 Anti theft system 82 Audio system see Radio 26 28 31 36 Automatic transmission driving an automatic overdrive 184 fluid adding 255 fluid CHECKING ois sssessucesseseceianees 255 fluid refill capacities 262 fluid specification 262 Police and fleet vehicles 268 Auxiliary power point 65 326 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Axle lubricant specifications 262 Police and fleet vehicles 270 refillcapacities 262 traction lok wee 183 B Battery amaa rer 233 acid treating emergencies 233 jumping a disabled battery 206 maintenance free 233 Police vehicles 270 replacement specifications 261 SETVICING EE eouivsmiiii 233 Belt Minder 106 Booster seats 137 Brakeg kia lin 177 178 antilock oenina 178 179 anti lock brake system ABS warning MONG sessen ee 179 fluid checking and adding 255 flui
80. 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid Canada only CXC 37 A B D or F Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 226 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets
81. 5 miles 56 km To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 or visit our website at www ford ca HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL The hazard flasher is located on the steering column just behind the steering wheel The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in 4 any position or if the key is not in the ignition A Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will 4 flash Press the flasher control again Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SWITCH HEL The fuel pump shut off switch is a device intended to stop the electric fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt After a collision if the engine cranks but does not start the fuel pump shut off switch may have been activated 189 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies The fuel pump shut off switch is located on the left side of the trunk behind the left rear tail light and the trunk liner lt a gt Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut off switch 1 Turn the ignition to the
82. 56 162 168 171 172 172 177 181 182 184 188 188 189 189 190 199 205 206 209 211 217 218 Table of Contents Cleaning 219 Maintenance and Specifications 227 Engine compartment 228 Engine oil 230 Battery 233 Engine coolant 235 Fuel information 241 Air filter s 257 Part numbers 261 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 262 Engine data 265 Crown Victoria Severe Duty 268 Accessories 298 Ford Extended Service Plan 300 Scheduled Maintenance Guide 304 Normal scheduled maintenance and log 309 Index 326 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2010 Ford Motor Company 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Motor Company product Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e In the United States www ford com e In Canada www ford ca e I
83. 7 4005 speedometer The digital display is Si oN ie gt more accurate than the analog gauge and may not match 17 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Engine coolant temperature N gauge Indicates engine coolant H temperature At normal operating temperature the needle will be in the normal range between H and C If it enters the red section C the engine is overheating Stop S the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Odometer Registers the total miles kilometers of the vehicle e Without Message center To switch the display from Metric to English press and hold the button on the cluster for three seconds e With Message center Refer to Message center in this chapter on how to switch the display from Metric to English and the odometer to the speedometer D00000 0 mi Trip odometer Registers the miles kilometers of individual journeys e Without message center Press and release the button on the gag TP O cluster to switch between odometer 4 and trip odometer display To reset press the button again until the trip reading resets 18 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster e With message center See TRIP A B under Message center T
84. 800 207 0685 or visit www camvap ca GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of 215 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia Pacific Region Sub Saharan Africa U S Virgin Islands Central America the Caribbean and Israel contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 313 594 4857 FAX 313 390 0804 Email expcac ford com If your vehicle must be serviced while
85. A fus Maintenance and Specifications The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XXX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX 2 Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint Devices and their location 3 Make vehicle line series body type 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO win DATE GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG Label The following table tells you FRONT GAWR XXXXL REARGAMR XXHXLE which transmission each code XXXXKG WTH XXXXKG WITH represents XXX A eg RNs AT XXX KPa XX PS COL AT XXX KPaXX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXTPNT XX RC XX DSO WETBRK TINTTR TIPPS TR TAXLE SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XMM XXXX XXXXXXX XX Four speed automatic overdrive 4R75E fr Q O 267 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty This information is intended to aid the operators of police or fleet vehicles used in severe duty high mileage operations in understanding the required maintenance services for su
86. E aed te owe ele Lem leas kl laa a lal ae sa elele kk ke anlar p dsur saa 9104 oer 11 sor zor 96 os s sz e 9 o sswwon ove saz ra voz z6T ost sor oer PT zer p ddmb jt 10914 are urqeo dedsuy ssuIyy osvais YI p ddmb Jl oyeouguj syutol n pue yeysealp spud pol 9y uotsuedsns syutol peq eseyul BUL199 S p ddmb Jr syooq yeys Fey Splalys y pue waysds ysneyxe pue Y13ua11S 10J Ul91S4S Suljooo auIsua ayelq Sued pue sasoy ayerq swumap S107041 saoys sped ayeiq dodsuy dadsuy dadsuy S9SOY dodsuy ssulul dedsuy squowlommbal IO Jafeap yNsuoD Yonsd p e y m peddmba JD paa PIN UOTsstuIsUBI onewome dadsuy popu9uuL0991 UoTedsut qurod ymu WL0J194 sep 10 SS9U9SOOJ T M ISTOU dsuJ dep 19114 pue lo aulsue asuey 000 T X S1030 ULOTTM 311 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide 24 000 km 48 000 km equipped Replace fuel filter Crown Victoria Grand Every 105 000 miles 168 000 km Inspect accessory drive belt s Every 150 000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter 240 000 km filter not required on 6F35 6F50 DPS6 and AWF 21 transmissions consult dealer for requirements Change rear axle fluid on all rear wheel drive within the last 100 000 miles 160 000 km Replace timing belt Fiesta Failure to rep
87. EFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 or online at https wwwapps tc gc ca Saf Sec Sur 7 PCDB BDPP Index aspx 218 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer e Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces e Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight e Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results e Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting e It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle e Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer e Remove any exterior accesso
88. G All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module WARNING Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries WARNING Ford Motor Company recommends that an authorized dealer inspect all steering column assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the steering column assembly could result in severe injury or death in the event of a collision WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the steering column its adaptive module or its fuses See your authorized dealer To properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position WARNING Do not put anything on or over the air bag module Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causin
89. L ETHANOL Ed75 Ed85 If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle FFV then only use UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10 ethanol Do not use fuel ethanol E85 diesel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the right fuel section Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended 246 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage FFV engine if equipped If your
90. ON P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Scheduled Maintenance Guide 315 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS If you operate your Ford Lincoln Mercury vehicle primarily in one of the more demanding Special Operating Conditions listed below you will need to have some items maintained more frequently If you only occasionally operate your vehicle under these conditions it is not necessary to perform the additional maintenance For specific recommendations see your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership service advisor or technician Towing a trailer or using a camper or car top carrier Inspect frequently service as Inspect and l
91. Place the ignition switch in the on position and then back to off 4 Place the headlamp switch in the autolamp position e At this point the exterior lamps turn on 5 At the desired autolamp time delay place the headlamp switch in the off position e At this point the exterior lamps turn off and the time delay is set 46 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Fog lamp control if equipped With the ignition on the fog lamps o can be turned on when the H 2 headlamp control is pulled toward FO you and is in any of the following positions co e Parking lamps e Low beams zD PULL gt e Autolamps when active Fog lamps will turn off when the high beams are activated High beams Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate Pull the lever toward you to deactivate Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate N x Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output To activate e the key must be in the on position e the headlamp control is in the off or DQ position e the vehicle is not in P Park 47 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Light DRL System does not activate your tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting
92. RIP A in this chapter HHHH H mi Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute a Driving with your tachometer lt 2 emil 2 pointer continuously at the top of 6 the scale may damage the engine VORTY D o gt Fuel gauge Indicates 7 approximately how much fuel is left F in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the on position The fuel lt m gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade E The arrow near the fuel pump icon N indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED With the ignition in the on position the message center located on your instrument cluster displays important vehicle information through a constant monitor of vehicle systems You may select 000000 0 mi display features on the message center for a display of status The system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by a long indicator chime 19 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster ME G E Ww A 000000 0 mi oR 000000 0 mi Your display can show up to three reconfigurable telltales at one time What ever is displayed in the top left corner has the highest priority Premium Display Severity Indicator located und
93. Reinstall the access plug cover start the vehicle and release the parking brake WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4 speed automatic transmission P Park This position locks the transmission P R N D 2 1 pS and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Start the engine e Press the brake pedal 184 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neu
94. See Cold weather starting earlier in this chapter for more information on starting with ethanol WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Prior to using the engine block heater follow these recommendations for proper and safe operation e For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard e Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord minimum e Use as short an extension cord as possible e Do not use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to the outlet without stretching e Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can deteriorate extension cords over a period of time 176 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e To reduce the risk of elect
95. Table of Contents Introduction 4 Instrument Cluster 12 Warning lights and chimes 12 Gauges 17 Message center 19 Entertainment Systems 26 AM FM stereo 26 AM FM stereo with CD 28 AM FM stereo cassette with CD 31 AM FM stereo with in dash six CD 36 Climate Controls 42 Manual heating and air conditioning 42 Automatic temperature control 43 Rear window defroster 45 Lights 46 Headlamps 46 Turn signal control 51 Bulb replacement 52 Driver Controls 63 Windshield wiper washer control 63 Steering wheel adjustment 64 Power windows 66 Mirrors 66 Speed control 69 Locks and Security 72 Keys 72 Locks 72 Anti theft system 80 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Seating and Safety Restraints Seating Safety restraints Airbags Child restraints Tires Wheels and Loading Tire information Tire inflation Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Vehicle loading Trailer towing Recreational towing Driving Starting Brakes Traction Control Air suspension Transmission operation Roadside Emergencies Getting roadside assistance Hazard flasher control Fuel pump shut off switch Fuses and relays Changing tires Wheel lug nut torque Jump starting Wrecker towing Customer Assistance Reporting safety defects U S only Reporting safety defects Canada only 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 87 87 95 110 123 141 141 143 1
96. USA fus Entertainment Systems SEL TEXT B to switch ON or OFF When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets When activated AUTOSET will momentarily appear in the display when any of the preset controls are pressed Speed sensitive volume Radio volume changes automatically and slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 1 3 Level 0 turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting Press MENU repeatedly to access and use lt q SEL TEXT P to adjust the volume setting The level will appear in the display Dolby Works in tape mode to reduces tape noise and hiss Press MENU until DOLBY XX appears in the display Press 4 SEL TEXT gt to switch ON or OFF The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Setting the clock Press MENU repeatedly until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is displayed Press amp SEL TEXT P gt to manually decrease increase the hours minutes Press MENU again to disengage clock mode Note The menu selections will remain in the display for approximately 10 seconds at which time the display will return to the previous mode You may also exit the me
97. V JO TU SIT ZO p PPV loy T H y JO W0 0q Y Mojog Wu FT 0 WUT 9 YOUT 91 6 0 YOU F T L Teal Y SUMY Aq pouTUtejep ore sotoedeo Jor 391419 UOUNUAOJUL BOUDUAIULOUL paynpayos UL SUOYUPUOJ buiypsedgQ jworiseds 40 pun suordarxy vas sjuswterimMbes Ap a1aAes JOY 391A19S RULIOU 10J pasn ST PPTY A olf USYM ofl 10J PAPINI palap suo9 oie sopxe Iwsy TRAIOJUL VOIAIOS 9991109 VY UTULIAJOP 0 UOUVWUALOfUL BDUDUAIUIOUL Pa NpayIs 0 Jojoy oseurep UOTSSTUSURIJ osneo ABUL pny pepusWUWOdIaI ay uey 19y30 p nyj Aue Jo asp CITT suenb gq Ayoedeo ol oseyoeg Ssul puey 10 991f0g asuel Suryetodo JeuLlou syonsdip y UO uoneapu ayy Aq 79S aq pmoys eae pmyj pue pmy UOTSSTUISURI JO yuNOUTe sy 191009 yueg ur ue yLM poddinbea jt pue 9ZIS 19 009 uo paseq Area Lew suoTyeoydde awog Ajoedeo YJ Arp oyeuntxordde ATUO soyeorpuy ravi UOLO TTY 9U PUR Y O 6OZN SSM UOTeoyloeds p10 Jo syusu mbal ay Joour ATUO p u IO 9ulSuy ATOYEpULUT JOU ST IO OJOUL PUs q I YJU S 10 M YJU S JO asf gporyea INOA ut peddimbe ATfeursi10 adAy yueTOoD 94 PPV p104 lequinu 31ed pIo 10 oweU j1ed p oj 264 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Crown Victoria cro USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA Engine _ s 4 6L V8 engine 4 6L FFV V8 engine Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane or Ethanol E85 1 3 7 2 6 5 4 8 1 3 7 2 6 5 4 8 Coil on plug Coil on plug Spark plug gap 0 052 0 056 inch 0 041
98. WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s safety belts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing WARNING On vehicles equipped with seat mounted airbags do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH EDITION For King Ranch leather seats refer to a separate section in this chapter e Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible e For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 Dry the area with a soft cloth e If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors e To check for compatibility first test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing or damage to the leather LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH EDITION ONLY IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium top g
99. XXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT _ XX RC XX DSO WBTBRK TINTTR TTPPS TR AXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XAXXXXXXXXXXX XIX XXXX XXXXXXX XX DATE XX XX FRONT GAWR XXXXL XXXXKG WITH XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES MFD BY F FORD MC MOTOR 0 GU XXX 1840006 GU FRONT mi N7 a GAWR PHBE AR DATE xx xx i ri ay XXX AVEC T RES PNEUS A POX XXXX XXXXXX RIMS JANTES XXxXXX AT A kPa PS ALPC xxx xx COLD A FROID xxx xx JUMELEES VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXX XXXX COMPLIES 000 00 ox ROK bt tia a ill yi TP TR TANE R SPR X XX X XXXX XXX O 0000000000000 XXX TOOOGXKOGOOC XX WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 165 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicles braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separa
100. a cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Climate control features TEMP Press to increase or decrease the interior temperature POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT A WARNING Do not install additional floor mats on top of the factory installed floor mats as they may interfere with the accelerator or the brake pedals Position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the pointed end of the retention post and rotate forward to lock in Make sure that the mat does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator or the brake pedal To remove the floor mat reverse the installation procedure INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL The remote trunk release control is located on the driver s door trim panel and can be operated at any time You can render the switch inoperable by locking the button with your master key i y 71 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security KEYS The vehicle is equipped with a master key which will access the vehicle s doors trunk glove box ignition and remote trunk release POWER DOOR LOCKS e Press the control to unlock all doors e Press the control to lock all doors Smart locks if equipped With the key in any ignition position and either the driver s or passenger s door open the doors cannot be locked using the power door lock switches The vehicle may still be locked with the key in
101. a 149 safety practices 148 sidewall information 150 snow tires and chains 161 Spare TLC asics sinire see 199 201 terminology 142 t regrades 142 LP e hr e E 141 146 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus TOWING aksam rna esya 168 recreational towing 171 trailer TOWING sl msn 168 WIECKER ese sesime nEn 209 Traction Control 181 Traction lok rear axle 183 Transmission 184 brake shift interlock BSI 183 fluid checking and adding automatic 255 fluid refill capacities 262 lubricant specifications 262 Ke EK ANE ES JD ME ME 74 Pack and loading 282 remote release 71 77 UPN signal secrctari 51 vV Vehicle Identification Number VIN rel salan lr 266 Vehicle loading es 162 Ventilating your vehicle 175 WwW Warning lights see Lights 12 Washer fluid 229 Water Driving through 187 Windows POWET rererere rRe R 66 Windshield washer fluid and WIDGETS seans ar sayim eR 63 checking and adding fluid 229 replacing wiper blades 229 Wrecker towing 209 331
102. a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart 151 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law Letter rating Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire
103. ace of the circuit board 3 Remove the old battery Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries 4 Insert the new battery Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 5 Snap the two halves back together Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement Replacing lost transmitters Take all your vehicle s transmitters to your authorized dealer if service is required If a remote transmitter has been lost and you would like to remove it from the vehicle s memory or you would like to purchase additional remote transmitters and have them programmed to your vehicle e Take all your vehicle s transmitters to your authorized dealer for programming or 78 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security e Perform the following programming procedure yourself Note Ensure the brake pedal is not pressed during this sequence Place the key in the ignition and cycle from 1 off to 3 on eight times in rapid succession within 10 seconds After doors lock unlock press any control on all transmitters up to four After pressing the contro
104. ach the new blade to the arm A loop and pull it into place until a click is heard Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter 229 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element ENGINE OIL 575 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait up to 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 5 Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again e If the oil level is within this range the oil level is acceptable 4 4 DO NOT ADD OIL lt C RRR 230 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e If the oil level is below this ma
105. adio noise When starting a fuel injected engine avoid pressing the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions 172 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions A computer system controls the engine s idle revolutions per minute RPM When the engine starts the idle RPM runs higher than normal in order to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM Be
106. age compartment door lid or inside the luggage compartment near the tail lamps WARNING Keep vehicle doors and luggage compartment locked and keep keys and remote transmitters out of a child s reach Unsupervised children could lock themselves in the trunk and risk injury Children should be taught not to play in vehicles Locks and Security oD WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or animals unattended in the vehicle On hot days the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat related injuries including brain damage Small children are particularly at risk 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range
107. agement feature section in this chapter Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning light and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required The restraints control module RCM monitors its own internal circuits and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt buckle sensors front passenger sensing system and the driver seat position sensor In addition the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The warning light will either flash or stay lit e The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the Personal Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision 98 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Safety restraints precautions WARNING Always drive
108. airbag protection for adult occupants and an attachment method for a child restraint If the child seat interferes with driving the vehicle and the child restraint is forward facing the child may be restrained in the passenger seat Move the seat as far rearward as possible to minimize the likelihood of interaction with the front passenger airbag Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts Ensure the child is properly restrained in an appropriate child seat or with the use of a booster 131 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 1 Lengthen the lap belt To lengthen the belt hold the tongue so that its bottom is perpendicular to the direction of webbing while sliding the tongue up the webbing 2 Place the child safety seat in the center seating position 3 Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on the tongue 5 Push down on the child seat while pulling on the loose end of the lap belt webbing to tighten the belt 6 Before placing the child into the child seat forcibly tilt the child seat from side to side and in fo
109. aited the necessary time for the programming to confirm turn the ignition to the off position Once disabled the autolock or autounlock feature can be enabled by repeating the procedure in Steps 1 8 CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside The rear doors can be AD opened from the outside when the doors are unlocked The childproof locks are located on rear edge of each rear door and R must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock oan N for both doors Move lock control up to engage the X childproof lock Move control down N to disengage childproof locks INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE Your vehicle is eguipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and location of the release handle 74 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus To open the luggage compartment door lid from within the luggage compartment pull the illuminated T shaped handle and push up on the trunk lid The handle is composed of a material that will glow for hours in darkness following brief exposure to ambient light The T shaped handle will be located either on the lugg
110. aler as soon as possible 120 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided How does the side airbag system work The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags The side airbag system consists of the following e An inflatable bag airbag with a gas generator concealed behind the outboard bolster of the driver and front passenger seatbacks e A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment e The same warning light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Two crash sensors located near the side of the vehicle Side airbags in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats In certain lateral collisions the airbag on the side affected by the collision will be inflated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided o
111. amage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components AIR FILTER Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element When changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running Changing the air filter element 1 Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover 2 Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing 3 Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing 4 Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or debris and to ensure good sealing 257 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Install a new air filter element Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated 6 Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps 7 Replace the air inlet tube and secure the clamp Note Be sure the hinge featu
112. amps are operated Note If the bulb is accidentally touched it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used 1 With the flat side of the new bulb s plastic base facing upward insert the glass end of the bulb into the lamp assembly Turn the bulb left or right to align the grooves in the plastic base with the tabs in the lamp assembly When the grooves are aligned push the bulb into the lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp assembly 2 Install the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts the rear of the socket by rotating it clockwise until you feel a stop 3 Connect the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic base until it snaps locking it into position 4 Install the headlamp assembly with two retainers 5 Install the radiator cover locking it in place with three retainers 6 Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly If the headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb you should not need to align it again Replacing front parking turn signal lamp bulbs To remove the front parking turn signal lamp bulbs 1 Make sure headlamp switch is in the off position then open the hood 2 Remove the radiator cover by turning the three retainers to the unlock position 3 Remove two retainers and pull headlamp assembly forward to expose bulb 4 Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise then pulling it out of the la
113. and Loading Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which
114. and back seat occupants in the event of a high speed rear impact After market organizers that do not adequately deform in rear impacts can themselves become injury producing objects When locating securing and mounting police equipment please review the Trunk Equipment Mounting Guide available on the www cvpi com website which provides recommended fastener mounting types and locations WARNING Following the trunk packing considerations also on the www fleet ford com website is the most meaningful method of reducing risk If your department practice is inconsistent with the Trunk Packing Considerations then Ford suggests that you consider purchasing an optional drop in Trunk Pack to further reduce the risk of injury resulting from police equipment pushing forward into the back seat and or fuel tank in the event of a high speed rear impact The Trunk Pack provides more flexibility to officers transporting police equipment than the trunk packing considerations To improve trunk packing by police agencies Ford has made the following items available e Trunk Pack a drop in box with a tough plastic shell made of high density Polyethylene HDPE It both aligns police equipment laterally in the trunk and utilizes a puncture resistant lining on the forward side of the box to reduce the risk of police equipment penetrating into the fuel tank and or back seat in high speed rear impacts e Trunk Equipment Mounting Guide an ou
115. and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit in a rear seating position where they can be properly restrained WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person WARNING When possibl
116. ap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children in this chapter for more information Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seatback Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments 4 l l Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown _ gt WARNING Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death 133 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle asse
117. are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http Avww nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http www sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child 123 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children l gt Recommended ei Child size height weight or age ami ae Infants or Children weighing 40 Ib 18 kg or less Use a child safety toddlers generally age four or younger seat sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Children who have outgrown or no Use a longer properly fit
118. are not properly designed for automotive use or not properly installed For example when operated such systems may cause the engine to stumble or stall and may affect 4R70W transmission operation In addition such systems may themselves be damaged or their operation affected by operating your vehicle Citizen band CB transceivers garage door openers and other transmitters whose power output is 5 watts or less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle s operation 280 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Because we have no control over the installation design or manufacture of such systems Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage that may result if you use this equipment Malfunction of aftermarket electronic equipment should be resolved by the equipment manufacturer Aftermarket equipment installation Ford has developed a Police Interceptor Modifier Guide to assist the vehicle modifier in safely installing police equipment into the vehicle The guide provides detailed information on the location of key vehicle components that must be untouched and warnings for other areas where caution must be exercised The Modifier Guide is available for downloading free of charge from www fleet ford com When installing aftermarket equipment avoid using fasteners that are too long for the application or are in an area which might damage vehicle components
119. ay contain zero to 85 ethanol Any fuel blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as Fuel Ethanol To identify if your vehicle is an FFV it may be equipped with a yellow fuel cap with the text E85 Gasoline or check if there is a label on the fuel filler door Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor beer and wine It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn and sugar cane When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels a small 242 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications amount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use The resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it is denatured with 2 to 5 gasoline and is suitable for automotive use During the summer season fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 85 denatured ethanol Ed85 and 15 unleaded gasoline The fuel ethanol has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power Winter blends may contain up to 75 denatured ethanol Ed75 and up to 25 unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts Severely cold weather may require additional measures for reliable starting Refer to Starting in the Driving chapter Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline It corrodes some metals and causes some plastic and r
120. ay have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 206 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an expo
121. briefcase notebooks spray bottles helmet and jumper cables It is not essential but recommended that the Trunk Pack can be considered for organization of low risk items especially if mixed with Carry With Caution items 284 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty BODY Fire suppression system if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional fire suppression system The fire suppression system is designed to help reduce the risk of injury in high speed rear impacts The fire suppression system deploys chemicals designed to slow the spread of fire or potentially extinguish a fire thereby providing more time for occupants to escape from a crashed vehicle The fire suppression system is mounted beneath the vehicle and attached to the frame above and forward of the fuel tank and rear axle The fire system control module is mounted inside the passenger compartment centered underneath the rear seat cushion The system is designed to deploy automatically after sensing a high speed high energy rear end impact There is a covered manual activation switch mounted in a console on the headliner between the visors that can be used by vehicle occupants to manually deploy the system The fire suppression system can be manually deployed any time the key or engine is turned on by pushing the button underneath the cover The button can be accessed three ways 1 Pushing on t
122. bstruction e Pull the vehicle over e Turn the vehicle off e Driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat e Remove the obstruction s if found Restart the vehicle e Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is no longer illuminated If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated this may or may not be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer WARNING The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center seating position WARNING An out of position front center occupant could affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer Assistance section of this Owner s Guide WARNING Any alteration modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system 119 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer
123. ccupants in side impact collisions The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Side airbags are designed 121 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints to inflate in side impact collisions not roll over rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the side airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness l
124. ce fuel filter Crown Victoria Grand Marquis and Town Car Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid not required on 6R80 transmission Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km Replace spark plugs 317 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Crown Victoria police interceptor amp taxi and Executive Series Town Car equipped with engine idle hour meter Inspect frequently service as Replace cabin air filter if equipped required Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Inspect brake system Rotate fires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if equipped with grease fittings Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or Inspect and lubricate U joints 6 months Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Change engine oil and replace oil filter see description 6 months or as indicated by below time mileage calculation Every 15 000 miles 24 000 km Replace fuel filter Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid not required on 6R80 transmission Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km Replace spark plugs 318 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide ENGINE IDLE HOUR METER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equippe
125. ce vehicles only oa battery feed Police vehicles only 50A Rear power point or Police right hand kick panel accessory battery feed Police vehicles only 197 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Location Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Rating Police accessory and PDB Police vehicles only Police accessory and PDB Police vehicles only 50A Rear power point or Police right hand kick panel accessory battery feed Police vehicles only A C clutch Not used Ignition coil POM Fog lamps Grand Marguis only Fuel Notused Notused Horn Starter Full ISO relay Air compressor non Police vehicles only RUN ACC relay Police vehicles only Blower Rear defrost relay Notused POM Not used 20A Circuit Power seats Lumbar Decklid Police breaker vehicles only 20A Circuit RUN ACC relay feed Windows breaker Decklid Police vehicles only Mini fuse Cartridge fuse 198 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Relays Relays are located in the power distribution box and should be replaced by an authorized dealer CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Note
126. ch vehicles It covers maintenance services for vehicles equipped with Heavy Duty packages However other vehicles operated under the conditions listed in this supplement are also considered severe service vehicles and should be serviced and maintained as described in this chapter and the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter CONTACT US Ford Fleet Hotline The Ford Fleet Hotline provides police and fleet customers with direct access to Ford Motor Company for fleet sales or service information The hotline number is 800 34 FLEET Ford Fleet website Additionally Ford maintains a website for police and other fleet vehicles The Ford Fleet website is located at www fleet ford com Police and fleet vehicles are manufactured with certain heavy duty parts that are designed specifically for the varying demands and unique requirements under which they are operated Note As the police proportion of the Crown Victoria market continues to increase some of these heavy duty components have become standard across the Crown Victoria line to reduce parts and manufacturing complexity Components that are part of the option packages are listed below and on the following pages with a brief outline of their major features and their contribution to overall vehicle performance handling and usage Failure to maintain your vehicle s properly may restrict your warranty coverage reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely af
127. charge as necessary Keep connections clean e If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained for quick starting Note If battery cables are disconnected it will be necessary to reset memory features 259 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Brakes e Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released Tires e Maintain recommended air pressure Miscellaneous e Make sure all linkages cables levers and pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust e Move vehicles at least 25 feet 8 m every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion Removing vehicle from storage When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage do the following e Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build up on window surfaces e Check windshield wipers for any deterioration e Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage mice squirrel nests e Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage e Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label e Check brake pedal operation Drive the vehicle 15 ft 4 5 meters back and forth to remove rust build up e Check fluid levels including coolant oil and gas to make sure there are n
128. ck against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion Can the child sit without slouching e Does the lap belt rest low across the hips Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip 137 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Types of booster seats There are generally two types of belt positioning booster seats backless and high back Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap shoulder belt e Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice 138 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap be
129. commended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road 148 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but
130. conditions at GCWR or any combination of these factors consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so equipped Refer to the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for the lubricant specification Remember that regardless of the rear axle lube used do not tow a trailer for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of a new vehicle and that the first 500 miles 800 km of towing be done at no faster than 70 mph 113 km h with no full throttle starts e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade If you must park on a grade place wheel chocks under the trailer s wheels Launching or retrieving a boat Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval e Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper e Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 in 15 cm above the bottom edge of the rear bumper 170 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components e Causing internal damage to the components e Affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or chan
131. coveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services Canadian customers refer to your Warranty Guide or visit our website at www ford ca for information on Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the 188 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Warranty Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 3
132. cted service is re quired or the axle assembly has been submerged in water The axle and PTO lubricant should be changed anytime the axle and PTO have been submerged in water During extended trailer tow operation above 70 F 21 C ambient and wide open throttle for extended periods above 45 mph 72 km h non synthetic rear axle lubricants should be replaced every 3 000 miles 4 800 km or three months whichever occurs first The 3 000 mile 4 800 km lubricant change interval may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear lubricant meeting Ford specification WSL M2C192 A part number F1TZ 19580 B or equivalent Add friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles refer to Maintenance product and specifications in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for details The axle lubricant should be changed anytime an axle has been submerged in water Police Taxi Livery vehicle axle maintenance Replace rear axle lubricant every 100 000 miles 160 000 km Rear axle lubricant change may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear lubricant meeting Ford specification WSLM2C192 A part number FITZ 19580 B or equivalent Add four ounces 118 ml of friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles The axle lubricant should be changed anytime the axle has been submerged in water California fuel filter
133. ction to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter 238 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates l
134. ctoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty have been tested and certified by a NIJ approved ballistic testing laboratory in accordance with the methodology included in NIJ Standard 0108 01 and Los Angeles Police Department LAPD Standard MTD 05 01E Manufactured by combining ballistic grade ceramic and High Performance Para Aramid this composite ballistic door panel has been extensively tested with rounds called out in the above referenced specifications WARNING As with body armor protection provided by the ballistic panel is limited Certain rounds or combinations of rounds may penetrate the panel and cause serious injury or death Use of ballistic door panels It is critical that officers understand where the panel is located inside the door in order to achieve optimal ballistic protection The door panels are designed to provide a shield for the officer at the scene of an altercation Any protection afforded the officer while patrolling inside the vehicle is incidental The ballistic ceramic faces the outside of the door It is imperative that the officer using the panel as a ballistic shield has the exterior of the door facing the threat In other words the officer should be positioned behind the interior portion of the door for ballistic protection The above illustration is an outside view of the left front door The shaded area represents the area covered by the ballistic doo
135. cured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control 205 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loose particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease around the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT apply grease to lugnut stud holes or wheel to brake surfaces JUMP STARTING WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission m
136. d refill capacities 262 fluid specifications 262 lubricant specifications 262 POCE arr deka as 279 shiftinterleork 183 BUDS A O 52 C Capacities for refilling fluids 262 Cell phone USE 8 Changing a tire 199 Child safetyseats 127 attaching with tether straps 135 in front seat wo 128 IN rear seat sesimin ayla 128 131 TAD ME 132 recommendations 125 Child safety seats booster SOAUS sara ii ariel 137 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment 220 instrument panel 222 INGETION amaa ia 223 Plastic parts 221 waeshing 219 WAKING ER MA Ke ionis 219 W NGE S saniez anin saresndi sakar 220 wiperblades 222 Climate control see Air conditioning or Heating 43 Clock adjust 6 CD i da emerek 39 AMIE Sess amele ni 27 AMFMCD 30 AM FM Tape CD 34 CONSOLE aaa lam hayal ala 65 Controls DOWEL SEAL Sisam an 91 steeringcolumn 70 Coolant checking and adding 235 refill capacities 238 262 Specifications 262 COGlEP arsam e im TAE 273 Cruise control see Speed COMUPOL Senar el nesi Mics 69 Cupholder s
137. d Motor 305 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Company s specifications and we stand behind them Parts installed at your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership carry a nationwide 12 months 12 000 mile 20 000 km parts and labor limited warranty Your dealer can give you details Value shopping for your vehicle s maintenance needs Your dealership recognizes the competitive landscape of maintenance and light repair automotive services With factory trained technicians and one stop service from routine maintenance like oil changes and tire rotations to repairs like brake service check out the value your Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealers can offer WHICH MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE SHOULD YOU FOLLOW Owner checks and services Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed by the owner or a service technician at the intervals indicated Service information and supporting specifications are provided in this owner s guide Any adverse condition should be brought to the attention of your dealer or qualified service technician as soon as possible for the proper service advice The owner maintenance service checks are generally not covered by warranties so you may be charged for labor parts or lubricants used Maximum oil change interval 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine coolant change interval 6 years or 105 000 mil
138. d Service Plan ESP Ford ESP is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company Depending on the plan you purchase Ford ESP provides benefits such as e Rental reimbursement e Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items e Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires e Roadside Assistance benefits You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford Motor Company dealership There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs including reimbursement for towing and rental When you purchase Ford ESP you receive peace of mind protection throughout Canada and the United States provided by a network of Ford Motor Company dealers For more information visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www ford ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you NOTE Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are not eligible for Ford ESP coverage This information is subject to change 303 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Why maintain your vehicle This guide describes the scheduled maintenance required for your vehicle Carefully following this schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may also h
139. d more than approximately five minutes or until 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the safety belts are buckled the ignition switch has been turned to on The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts All statistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare events 36700 crashes occur every day The more we drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles 40 km of home Belts are uncomfortable We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort T was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t work Safety belts when used properly reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45 in cars and by 60 in light trucks 107 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Traffic is light Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single vehicle crashes many when no other vehicles are around Belts wrinkle my clothes Possibly but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes particu
140. d result 39 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 13 AM FM Press repeatedly to switch between AM FM1 FM2 mode 14 CD Press to enter CD mode Press CD and a preset to select a specific CD to play 15 SAT Your system may be equipped with Satellite Ready capability The kit to enable the Satellite reception is available through your authorized dealer Detailed satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit Check with your authorized dealer for availability 16 SHUF Shuffle SCAN Press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks on the current CD Press again to stop SHUF Shuffle Press and hold to play the CD tracks in random order for the CD currently being played Press again to stop GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from a station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception e Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception e Station overload When
141. d with an idle meter to indicate how much time the vehicle is idling in P Park or N Neutral The meter is incorporated with the vehicle odometer Depressing the odometer reset button once will display the trip odometer miles km followed by a T for trip odometer Depressing the odometer reset button a second time will display the idle meter hours followed by an H for hours The idle meter only accumulates time when the vehicle is in P Park or N Neutral Displayed time is cumulative for the vehicle It cannot be reset to zero Police Fleet vehicles often experience long periods of idling during which engine oil will continue to break down but distance is not accumulated on the odometer To assist fleet managers in maintaining proper oil change intervals the idle meter will help determine when an oil change is required For every hour that the vehicle idles it has accumulated the equivalent of approximately 33 miles 53 km of driving Using the combination of the vehicle odometer and idle meter allows the fleet manager to better determine when the oil needs to be changed Engine idle hour meter calculation Idle hours x 33 miles km equivalency Miles km driven miles km equivalency oil change interval Example When the odometer has accumulated 3 000 miles 4 800 km and the idle meter shows 61 hours a 5 000 mile 8 000 km oil change interval will have been reached 3 000 road miles 4 800 road km 61 idle h
142. ded inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is on visually 160 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and chains If you need to use chains it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as chains may chip aluminum wheels Note The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your
143. defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 152 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 14 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest
144. ding your tire pressure monitoring system TPMS The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The low tire warning lamp will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information When your temporary spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle This includes the optional full sized matching spare wheel and tire as it is intended for temporary use only To restore the full functionality of the tire pressure monitoring system have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle For additional information refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information c
145. during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel during headlamp ooCOCIq00 Rr and parking lamp operation e Rotate the thumbwheel from left fi rift to right to brighten the ce Cathe i T J instrument panel e Rotate the thumbwheel from right to left to dim the instrument panel Dome lamp control The panel dimmer control also controls the dome lamp operation e Rotate the thumbwheel fully to the right past detent to activate the dome lamp e In order to turn off the dome lamp rotate the thumbwheel to the left AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer Headlamp aim adjustment Crown Victoria only The headlamps are designed to be mechanically aimed but can also be aimed visually by doing the following 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away Check your headlamp alignment at night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern 48 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizonta
146. e Maplamp 9G Map lamp Dual floorwell lamp Glove compartment Visor vanity lamp Slide on Rail system SOR Replacing interior bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently A6224PF Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently 53 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing headlamp bulbs Crown Victoria only To remove the headlamp bulb 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position then open the hood 2 Remove the radiator cover by turning the three retainers to the unlock position pull headlamp assembly forward to 3 Remove the two retainers and expose bulb 4 Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling f Cag 5 Remove the bulb retaining ring by rotating it counterclockwise when f A Z viewed from the rear to free it from the bulb socket and slide the ring off the plastic base Keep the ring to retain the new bulb 4 6 Without turning remove the old bulb from the lamp assembly by gently pulling it straight back out of the lamp assembly 54 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights To install the new bulb WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headl
147. e this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel e Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Fuel filler cap When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off 3 Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe 4 To install the cap align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe 5 Turn the filler cap clockwise until it clicks at least once If the check fuel cap light amp or a CHECK FUEL CAP message comes on the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed The light or message can come on after several driving events after you ve refueled your vehicle 244 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications At the next opportunity safely pull off of the road remove the fuel filler cap align the cap properly and reinstall it The check fuel cap light BR or CHECK FUEL CAP message may not reset im
148. e as well as those things that may require future or immediate attention The multi point vehicle inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great HARA CENNE eee lt GLEIS mer Fv ey A Fame Sor s Balance Multi Point Inspection Report Card as Recommended by Ford Motor Company Talay Ask hoci Mar ie Farag tenant EAE Minor Mobo Model ear Nia a fa Filler Enguedn Fite T RAJAS Oe m J Bim A Corki iutes in sobida ai dari Ai Fikr erk ay Terentia hed _ 4 erge Teds ie andy a parti Gal Of Vakia meaitarance tera and bu WOT eircteme Pease coset pour Owna anu cr wat warn gernuimenerwicacom k r wetiche DOW me a nny brake Spec Te mT OO EMC 8 a TEED e Frigawrds teleks m LI a udi es oO OO Owes OORS ee ee BA Hepa ports Sinir al Health Conditional p mabe Py EW ve asii bos Ea ep EETU ATETA WT apa pe ry Tene sel an C 5 nace nbn Fifer merka bah ederti Engis Lin skids hasard aad bask laTga HO sl sn Bees os rr Ergime Coming ster rac sit lacs sad chinga C re ett i res Tie oat Parma reap Tr Wear Palle Damy L mo nea ve Tio PS Ky kare PS Bia earner rot ne COGS feces cat mm re ure m a Cora LT roer t i
149. e pass airbag off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is off See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag supplemental restraints SRS section of this chapter Front safety belt usage sensors The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened This information allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage 97 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Front safety belt pretensioners The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body during frontal collisions and in side collisions This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal collisions the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the collision is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags Front safety belt energy management retractors The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in response to the occupant s forward momentum This helps reduce the risk of force related injuries to the occupant s chest by limiting the load on the occupant Refer to Energy man
150. e all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position 99 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming pe a from until you hear a snap and feel A7 C it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle N A a D 2 To unfasten press the release button and remove the tongue from y the buckle ar MN pd GAZ 100 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Restraint of pregnant women WARNING Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and the safety belt properly fastened The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest Pregnant women should also follow this practice See figure below Pregnant women should always wear their safety belt The lap belt portion of
151. e batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates to a freeze point of 34 F 36 C Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Proper function of calibrated gauges 235 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL or MIN MAX range as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon applica
152. e compartment This connector contains several fused power feeds and inputs available for the addition of accessories The following tables show the circuits available for equipment Pin Function ome e A Battery 10 Tanvellow e 20a Battery 14 Light Bee o 20ARuwace Sid en 271 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Taxi Pin Function o o Gauge Color ___ 1 Notused doo lt lt 5 Notused gt 50A Battery 10 Tewelow 8 10A RunAcc 14 Light Blue White 9 50A Battery 10 Yelew 10 Notused lt lt The mating connector is provided on the end of the power distribution connector The vehicle modifier can either purchase pins for the mating connector and install them on the wires before they are inserted into the connector thereby avoiding any splicing or purchase an optional power pigtail for the interface The power pigtail P N 144411 plugs into the power distribution connector and provides blunt cut wires ready for splicing by the vehicle modifier See the Police Interceptor Modifier Guide for more details Rear power point police The rear power point is a battery access port for police auxiliary equipment mounted in the trunk It is capable of supplying 80 amps of battery power The front power distribution box PDB contains two 50 amp fuses which protect the power point Battery
153. e coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain 239 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications How fail safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat e The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the H hot area The service engine soon K indicator light will illuminate e The message center Gf equipped will display COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE e The E symbol will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature e The engine will completely shut down causing steering and braking effort to increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage When fail safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
154. e dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel 200 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All wheel driving capability Gf applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible Full size matching spare tire wheel information This spare tire wheel will match the road tire wheel When driving with the full size matching spare tire wheel do not exceed 70 mph 113 km h It is intended for temporary use only This means if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible Stopping and securing the vehicle 1 Pa
155. e soon warning light to come on Refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 13 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning C P light is functional it will momentarily illuminate when the BRAKE ignition is turned to the on position when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on position If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time seek service immediately from your authorized dealer Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury continues to flash a malfunction has been detected have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays illuminated or ABS Airbag readiness If t
156. e tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section 155 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to O the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire cau
157. eat e Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat e Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing system The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket if equipped or hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console Gf equipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag Status Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system 118 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints In case there is a problem with the e front passenger sensing system the airbag readiness lamp in the IN instrument cluster will stay lit If the airbag readiness lamp is lit do the following The driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects that may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat If objects are lodged and or cargo is interfering with the seat please take the following steps to remove the o
158. ecommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot i e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated No
159. ed in the correct restraint system Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http Www sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 Chttp www tc gc ca Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle If the child is the proper height age and weight as specified by your child safety seat or booster manufacturer fits the restraint and can be restrained properly then restrain the child in the child safety seat or with the belt positioning booster Remember that child seats and belt positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of different heights ages and weights Children who are too large for child safety seats or belt positioning boosters as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer should always properly wear safety belts SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Infant and or toddler seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child
160. either clockwise to adjust down or counterclockwise to adjust up The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line 6 Close the hood and turn off the lamps HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NON ADJUSTABLE TURN SIGNAL CONTROL e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn signal The flash rate of the turn signal will speed up considerably if the left or right turn lamp bulb front or rear is burned out INTERIOR LAMPS Map courtesy lamps The courtesy lamps light when e any door is opened e the instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated past the detent e the unlock control of the remote entry controls is pressed and the ignition is off The reading lamps can be turned on by pressing the rocker controls next to each lamp 51 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights If equipped with remote keyless entry the courtesy lamp will illuminate whenever any door is opened and will remain on for 25 seconds after the door is shut or when the ignition is turned to the on position Rear courtesy reading lamps if equipped Rotate the lens to illuminate the lamp With the lens in the flat position the courtesy lamp lights when e any door is opened e the panel dimmer thumbwheel is rotated fully to the right past detent BULB REPLACEMENT Lam
161. elp to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is performed and that the materials used meet Ford engineering specifications Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specific in this guide will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance Be sure receipts for completed maintenance are kept with the vehicle and confirmation of the work performed is always recorded in this guide Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer has factory trained technicians who can perform the required maintenance using genuine Ford parts They are committed to meeting your service needs and to assuring your continuing satisfaction Protecting your investment Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of improved reliability durability and resale value To ensure the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems it is imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated intervals Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features That s why it s important to rely upon your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based u
162. emium Premium sound satellite compatible AM FM stereo Single CD Cassette system if equipped 20 AOL e o sat Did porsve nr ass BaL WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 1 CD slot Insert a CD label side S up With the ignition on the radio will begin to play a CD once inserted With the ignition off the CD control must be pressed before inserting the disc Failure may result in damage to the CD and or audio system 2 CD eject Press to eject a CD If 2 the disc is not removed within the allotted time the system will automatically reload the CD and begin play Note The eject function will work when the ignition is turned off 3 BASS Press BASS then m press lt Q SEL TEXT P gt to decrease increase the level of bass output TREB Treble Press TREB then press lt Q SEL TEXT P gt to E 4 decrease increase the level of treble mE output 4 BAL Balance Press BAL then press lt SEL TEXT P gt to sh
163. ent can be mounted in the side shelf areas but it must not protrude into the fuel tank area in a crash noted in Trunk Equipment Mounting Guide The optional Complete Police Prep Package is available to facilitate packaging of electronic components with a sliding tray for the forward package shelf and side compartments in the right and left shelf area All equipment should be located and mounted using the Trunk Equipment Mounting Guide for proper positioning of fasteners This guide can be accessed on the www fleet ford com website The sliding tray can also be used depending on size to properly store parts with rigid and sharp edges 3 Ammunition The safest location for ammunition is the forward package shelf and on the side shelves It is recommended that a plastic storage container be utilized and mounted using the Trunk Mounting Equipment Guide for proper fastener locations It is also recommended that ammunition remain in the purchased container and be placed in a safe storage container Low risk items These items are soft in feel and pose a low risk of trunk wall rear seat area and fuel tank puncture Examples are a soft camera case biohazard kit in plastic boxes gloves safety rope tow strap traffic cones amp sleeves rain gear riot gear soft emergency blankets bullet resistant vest tie straps cloth tape garment bags first responder kit Res Q Flo mask placed in garment bag fuses plastic container
164. ent course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA AB C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 141 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher l
165. er adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving 68 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved Using speed control The speed controls are located on the steering wheel there are two versions The following buttons work with speed control ON Press to turn the speed control on OFF Press to turn the speed control off RESUME Press to resume a set speed SET Press to set a speed or to increase or decrease a set speed Setting speed control 4 Press and release ON 5 Accelerate to the desired speed 6 Press and release SET 7 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 8 The indicator light if eguipped on the instrument cluster will turn on Note e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage Disengaging speed control Press the brake pedal to disengage the speed control Disengaging the speed
166. er the message center Indicates severity of the information being displayed on the premium display Red for high severity amber for medium severity and non lit for information only For example a door ajar warning would be accompanied by a red indicator low fuel by an amber indicator and fuel economy by an absence of the indicator The indicator always illuminates with the highest severity rating of the warnings displayed Info Information menu Press the INFO button repeatedly to cycle through the following features listed SETUP SELECT Press the RESET button reset functions in the information menu TRIP A B Registers the distance of individual journeys Press and release INFO button until the A or B trip appears in the display this represents the trip mode Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds to reset Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to English MILES km TO EMPTY This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel 20 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster The DTE function will display FUEL LEVEL LOW and sound a tone for one second when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty If you RESET this warning message this displa
167. es 168 000 km change engine coolant whichever comes first C After initial change change engine coolant every 3 years or 45 000 miles 72 000 km Check every month Check function of all interior and exterior lights C Check tires for wear and correct air pressure including spare tire Check windshield washer fluid level Check engine oil level 306 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Check every six months Check lap shoulder belts and seat latches for wear and function Check parking brake for proper operation Check safety warning lamps brake ABS airbag safety belt for operation Check cooling system fluid level and coolant strength Check battery connections and clean if necessary Check washer spray wiper operation and clean all wiper blades replace as necessary Check and lubricate all hinges latches and outside locks Inspect for correct operation Check and lubricate door rubber weatherstrips Inspect for excessive wear Check and clean body and door drain holes Inspect for clogs and obstructions mE mA m mE mi mi mi m m Multi point inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems Ford Motor Company recommends the following multi point inspection be performed at every scheduled maintenance
168. es driven under heavy duty service conditions Ford Motor Company installs heavy duty steel wheels Tires police Tires including the spare are speed rated radials for police use Use only the recommended tire size and speed ratings In regions with snow and ice during the winter months installation of snow tires may be desirable Snow tires will usually exhibit a drop in dry pavement handling but many show an increase in snow and ice traction When snow tires are used they should be installed on all four wheels never on the drive wheels only Tires long term storage Most high performance tires are made with a nylon overlay As such the following steps should be taken to avoid flatspotting when the vehicles are not used for a period of time e Fleets should store the vehicles with 44 psi 803 kPa in the tires e If the vehicle is stored for periods longer than 30 days it should be moved several feet at least once during each 30 day period so that a different portion of the tread contacts the ground e Tire pressure should be reduced to the recommended pressure shown on the vehicle certification label before the vehicle is placed back into service Training the tire pressure monitoring system TPMS All Crown Victorias are equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a O low tire pressure telltale on the instrument cluster when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated
169. es to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See your SYNC supplement for more information CELL PHONE USE The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices text messaging devices and portable two way radios 8 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws EXPORT UNIQUE NON UNITED STATES CANADA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region your vehicle may be equi
170. ess than 34 F 36 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50 e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60 e A coolant concentration of 60 will provide freeze point protection down to 62 F 52 C Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e If available refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40 e A coolant concentration of 40 will provide freeze point protection down to 12 F 24 C Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e If available refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection What you should know about fail safe cooling If the engin
171. ess warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or
172. evels of oma on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by aw WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them Glossary of tire terminology e Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry e Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code e Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire e Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 37 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires 142 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this
173. far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 1 Block the diagonally opposite wheel A aD he 2 Remove any wheel trim Insert the tapered end of the lug nut wrench behind wheel covers or hubcaps and twist off 3 Loosen each wheel metal lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground 203 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Before placing the jack under the vehicle NOTE the jack location markings JACK LOCATION B The jack location markings can be ia found on the lower outer edge of the body ln el e Locate the jack locator mark B on the body C near the tire you are changing then place the jack O O D under the frame A of O the vehicle aligning it with the mark B Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground SG 9 WARNING To lessen risk of personal injury do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack The jack is ONLY meant for changing the tire e Never use the rear differential as a jacking point 4 Remove the metal lug nuts with the
174. fect driver passenger safety The severe duty maintenance intervals are listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter The descriptions specifications and material described in this publication were in effect at the time the publication was approved for printing Ford Motor Company reserves the right to discontinue models at any time or change specifications design or testing procedures without notice and without incurring obligation TRANSMISSION The police vehicle has a unique high performance powertrain including transmission and an aluminum driveshaft which is designed for maximum vehicle performance Due to the nature of this powertrain some powertrain noise may be present 268 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Driving in the overdrive cancel mode for prolonged periods at high speeds will deteriorate performance and may cause extensive engine damage Crown Victoria police vehicles are designed to operate in the Overdrive gear selector position while in pursuit Optimum performance will be obtained in Overdrive Operation in the overdrive cancel mode should only be used in situations noted in this publication WARNING Under no circumstances should the aluminum driveshaft be replaced with a steel driveshaft Doing so will adversely affect vehicle operation which could lead to personal injury POWERTRAIN OVERSPEED PROTECTION The powertrain control mod
175. fety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or disabled will not inflate The front passenger sensing system will disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag if e the front passenger seat is unoccupied or has small medium objects in the front seat e the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e a front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time 115 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Note When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated the passenger seat mounted side airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator which will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled The indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel to the right of the radio over the glove box Note The indicator lamp wil
176. fore starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off 3 Make sure the gearshift is in P Park R RNO21 4 Make sure the parking brake is set 173 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving 5 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start 3 o Ok Q Some warning lights will briefly illuminate See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights Starting the engine 1 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start 2 Turn the key to 4 start then release the key as soon as the engine starts Excessive cranking could damage the starter Note If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try turn the key to OFF wait 10 seconds and try again If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try again this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel Cold weather starting flexible fuel vehicles only The starting characteristics of all grades of Egs ethanol make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C Consult your fuel distributor for the availabil
177. ft deterrent e When the ignition is in the on position the indicator will glow for three seconds to indicate normal system functionality If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position If this occurs contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off position The theft indicator on the instrument panel will flash every two seconds when the vehicle is armed 84 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Automatic disarming Switching the ignition to the on position with a coded key disarms the vehicle e The theft indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate for three seconds and then go out e If the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes rapidly contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Replacement keys If your keys are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Replacing coded keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare o
178. fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 8 8L may be required e The service engine soon indicator may come on For more information on the service engine soon C indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 3 000 km 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of this chapter 248 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty The amount
179. g lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated when the ignition is turned on until the BRAKE parking brake is fully released WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle However if the normal brakes fail the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes the vehicle s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected Pull the lever to release the parking brake 180 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving TRACTION CONTROL IF EQUIPPED The traction control system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow or ice covered roads and gravel roads The system will allow your vehicle to make better use of available traction in these conditions the traction control active light will illuminate you may hear an electric motor type of sound coming from the engine compartment and the engine may not rev up when you press farther on the accelerator This is normal system behavior and should be no reason for concern During traction control operation m WARNING Ag
180. g serious injury 111 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses See your authorized dealer WARNING The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center front seating position WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle Gncluding frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle Children and airbags Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the A risk of injury in a collision WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back NN 112 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Front seating positions only If seating two adults and a child Ford recommends properly restraining the child in the center front seating
181. ged unless a leak is suspected or repair required RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational RV towing An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four 4 wheels off the ground such as when using a car hauling trailer Otherwise no recreational towing is permitted In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle see Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 171 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1 Off shuts off the engine and all accessories locks the gearshift lever 3 and allows key removal 2 Accessory allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to 4 operate while the engine is not running 3 On all electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when driving 4 Start cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system This system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of r
182. gressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal injury or property damage The occurrence of a traction control event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this may lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If you experience a severe road event SLOW DOWN The traction control switch is located on the instrument panel The traction control system will automatically turn on every time the ignition is turned off and on When disabled OFF will be illuminated on the switch The traction control system will automatically turn on every time the ignition is turned to off and on If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road surface try switching the traction control system off Switching the traction control system off may allow excess wheel spin to dig the vehicle out and enable a successful rocking maneuver When the traction control system is off an indicator light will illuminate and will remain on until the system is turned back on or the ignition is turned off and on Remember to switch the traction control system back on once the vehicle is no longer stuck If a system fault is detected the traction control active light will illuminate the traction control button will not turn the system on or off and your veh
183. h can start a fire Illumination of the service engine soon Cc indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the on board diagnostics system OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also
184. he Driving chapter AIR SUSP OFF Displayed when the air suspension system is turned off For more information refer to Air suspension system in the Driving chapter FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition Warning message can be reset by pressing the RESET button but will return after 10 minutes If any other button is pressed besides RESET the message PRESS RESET TO CLEAR will appear in the message center Once this message disappears after approximately two seconds press RESET to clear the warning 24 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster TRUNK AJAR Displayed when the trunk is not completely closed OVERDRIVE OFF Displayed when the overdrive is enabled or disabled LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use Note this includes the use of the optional full sized matching spare tire and wheel For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Tire Pressure Monitori
185. he cover will release the cover latch allowing the door to swing open and expose the button 2 The cover can be pulled open 3 A firm strike on the cover about 20 lb ft 89 Nem of force will deploy the system any time the key or engine is turned on In the event of a manual deployment nozzles will deploy to near ground level and the underbody of the vehicle will be covered with suppressant fluid The suppressant contains no hazardous materials but may cause minor skin or eye irritation and can be readily cleaned up by flushing the underbody with water or soap and water Manual deployment should have no adverse affect on vehicle handling however caution should be exercised in moving the vehicle as ground clearance will be compromised by the deployed nozzles Because of reduced ground clearance the vehicle should not be driven through an automatic car wash with nozzles in the deployed condition 285 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty The fire suppression system is a single use system all major components will have to be replaced in the event of a manual deployment Figure A The approved ISO symbol for fire suppression is shown in Figure A This symbol is printed on the manual activation switch and on the diagnostic telltale on the instrument cluster The system automatically performs a diagnostic check self check and momentarily lights the cluster lamp when the
186. he letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire replacement requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended
187. her strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 5 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use Child booster seats The belt positioning booster booster seat is used to improve the fit of the vehicle safety belt Children outgrow a typical child seat e g convertible or toddler seat when they weigh about 40 Ib 18 kg and are around four 4 years of age Consult your child safety seat owner guide for the weight height and age limits specific to your child safety seat Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child remains appropriate for their weight height and age AND if properly secured to the vehicle 136 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection children who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on ch
188. here is a fault with the system traction control will be disabled Have the system serviced immediately Refer to the Driving chapter for more information Traction Control Flashes when the Traction Control system is Severity indicator if equipped Displays the indicated severity color when any of the following warning conditions has occurred e Red Low Oil Pressure Charge System Engine Coolant Over Temperature Door Ajar e Amber Low Fuel Refer to Message center in this chapter 15 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Illuminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains on at start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned to on the light will illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer For more information on this system refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Low tire pressure warning O Air suspension if eguipped Iuminates when the air suspension A is turned off the load limit is exceeded or the air suspension system requires servicing Low fuel if equipped Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near empty refer to Fuel gauge in thi
189. hicles equipped with EATC only 7 5A Ignition ON ACC Door lock switch illumination Heated seat switch illumination Radio Antenna Electrochromatic mirror Window relay coil Decklid relay coil and Police ON ACC relay coil Police vehicles only 10 15A Hazards non Police vehicles only Hazards Police vehicles only Ignition ON Turn signals 10A Ignition ON rear air suspension module RASM Cluster PAT SA Taxi Adjustable pedals 15 10A Ignition ON EATC module A C mode switch vehicles equipped with manual A C only A C blower relay coil 17 10A Ignition ON A C mode switch vehicles equipped with manual A C Blend door Heated seat modules LOM interior lighting LCM Left hand low beam 20 10A Ignition ON START Back up lamps Anti lock brake system ABS 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Location Rating LCM Right hand low beam 22 10A Ignition ON START Restraint control module RCM Occupant classification sensor OCS Passenger airbag deactivation indicator PADI 23 15A Multi function switch Flash to pass LCM High beams 24 10A Ignition ON START Passive anti theft system PATS module Powertrain control module PCM relay coil Fuel relay coil Ignition relay coil 25 15A LCM Park lamps corner lamps license lamps 26 10A Ignition ON START Cluster LCM
190. hild restraint system under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision 140 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 114 times as well on the governm
191. his light fails e to illuminate when the ignition is turned to on continues to flash or IN remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer A chime will sound when there is a malfunction in the indicator light Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder A chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restrainis chapter to activate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature 14 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Charging system Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related component Engine oil pressure Iluminates when the oil pressure falls below the IO normal range Check the oil level and add oil if needed Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Engine coolant temperature E Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high Stop the vehicle as soon as possible switch off the engine and let cool Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot active It will be illuminated solidly if t
192. hold down the accelerator 1 3 to 1 2 way to floor then crank the engine 2 When the engine starts release the key then gradually release the accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up If the engine still fails to start repeat Step 1 Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time open the windows at least 1 inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air 175 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A C electrical source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below 0 F 18 C For flexible fuel vehicles if operating with Egs ethanol an engine block heater must be used if ambient temperature is below 0 F 18 C
193. ication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com tems in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French Owner s Guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http Mwww safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 217 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercayr gov REPORTING SAFETY D
194. ick 228 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noise streaking and smearing Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass Turn the blade 4 as much as possible to gain access to the lock tab A Using a skinny tool press the lock tab to release 7 the blade from the arm loop and pull the blade from the arm 2 Att
195. icle should be serviced by an authorized dealer 181 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving STEERING To help prevent damage to the power steering system never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than a few seconds when the engine is running It is also important to maintain a proper power steering fluid level in the power steering fluid reservoir e Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level See Power steering fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter e Some noise is normal during operation If the noise is excessive check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering pump fluid level Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the maximum level as this may result in leaks from the reservoir See Power steering fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort If the steering wanders or pulls check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneven tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper steering alignmen
196. ide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position then open the trunk remove pin type retainer and carefully pull the carpet away to expose the lamp assembly hardware 2 Remove the three nuts and the lamp assembly from the vehicle 3 Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise then pulling it out of the lamp assembly 4 Pull the bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb 5 Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly by rotating it clockwise 6 Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle with three nuts ensuring the nuts are flush with the body to prevent water from entering the trunk 7 Carefully push the carpet back in to place and install the pin type retainer Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is 47 a in the off position then remove two screws grommets and the license plate lamp assembly from the trunk hi Ay 2 Carefully pull the bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb 3 Install the lamp assembly on the trunk lid with two grommets ensuring that the grommets are pushed all the way in to the trunk lid and secured with two screws 61 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing backup lamp bulbs 1 Open the trunk then remove the bulb socket from the trunk lid by turning it counterclockwise ye 2 Pull the bulb straight out of the socke
197. if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns 143 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure r
198. ified service technician Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 299 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS U S ONLY More than 30 million Ford Lincoln and Mercury owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford ESP It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage Up to 500 Covered Vehicle Components There are four new vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask your dealer for details PremiumCare Our most comprehensive coverage With over 500 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not covered ExtraCare Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items BaseCare Covers 84 components PowertrainCare Covers 29 cri
199. ift sound to the left right speakers FADE Press FADE then press lt SEL TEXT P gt to shift sound to the rear front speakers 5 Phone mute Press to mute the E playing media Press again to return to the playing media or turn the volume control to adjust the volume 6 SEL TEXT Use with Bass SEL TEXT P Treble Balance Fade and other menu functions TEXT TEXT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio Your radio may be equipped with Satellite ready capability The kit to enable Satellite reception is available through your dealer Detailed Satellite 32 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems instructions are included with the dealer installed kit Check with your authorized dealer for availability 7 MENU Press MENU repeatedly to access RDS ON OFF Press SEL TEXT gt to switch RDS ON or OFF Press MENU again to access Program type mode or Show Type Name mode MENU must be pressed within 10 seconds to proceed to the next RDS mode The Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC recommend that FM radio broadcasters use RDS technology to transmit information FM radio stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDS technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired FIND Program type Allows you to search RDS equipped stations for a certain category
200. ight same light as for front airbag system will either flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at your authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles including pretensioners Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel 122 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags Important child restraint precautions WARNING Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING All children are shaped differently The Recommendations for Safety Restraints
201. ildren who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap shoulder safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion while minimizing slouching Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder and across the center of the chest Moving the child closer a few centimeters or inches to the center of the vehicle but remaining in the same seating position may help provide a good shoulder belt fit When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they reach a height of at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall around age eight to age twelve and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 86 kg or upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 86 kg Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat e Can the child sit all the way ba
202. in a child safety belt positioning seat generally children who are less booster seat than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 86 kg and upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Children who have outgrown or no Use a vehicle longer properly fit in a belt positioning safety belt having booster seat generally children who the lap belt snug are at least 4 feet 9 inches and low across 1 45 meters tall or greater than 80 Ib the hips shoulder 36 kg or 100 Ib 45 kg if belt centered recommended by child restraint across the manufacturer shoulder and chest and seatback upright e You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the U S and Canada e Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 ft 9 in 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 86 kg Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle 124 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the
203. in the vehicle 297 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories FORD CUSTOM ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Ford Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Ford Custom Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty The following is a list of several Ford Custom Accessories Not all accessories are available for all models For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www fordaccessories com Lifestyle e Garmin navigation Peace of mind e Vehicle tracking and
204. including wiring brake lines fuel tank and lines powertrain components exhaust system and suspension Also do not make electrical connections to vehicle electrical systems not specifically designed for aftermarket equipment installations Refer to the Wiring Diagram Manual for electrical system information Do not install any components into the powertrain control module PCM or PCM harness Connecting into this system may affect engine and transmission operation As an example connection of aftermarket electrical equipment into the brake light circuit or any other circuit which is connected to the PCM anti lock brake computer airbag system or any other vehicle system which will cause vehicle malfunction WARNING Contact during a crash with aftermarket equipment in a vehicle can result in a personal injury WARNING Installation of prisoner barriers may increase the risk of injury to front seat occupants if the vehicle is impacted from the rear at high speeds This risk should be balanced by the law enforcement agency against the risk of injury to the Officer associated with prisoner transport 281 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Trunk Pack and trunk loading WARNING Ford recommends that police equipment be both secured and laterally aligned Hard stiff or sharp objects especially when not secured or properly located pose a risk to the fuel tank
205. independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada Note Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location such as latitude and longitude and or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the 911 Assist feature See your SYNC supplement for more information Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel information only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches your request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service Ford Motor Company and the vendors it us
206. ing in cold weather 1 Select NORM A C 2 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 3 Set the fan speed to HI 4 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL EATC SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED ae 2 L auto OUTSIDE TEMP muoane max ave tor ae ver roor D runner DEF QY 1 OFF Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate 2 AUTOMATIC Press AUTOMATIC and select the desired temperature using the temperature controls The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to the selected temperature The fan speed will remain automatic unless the thumbwheel is turned all the way to LO 43 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 3 Fan speed Turn to manually increase or decrease fan speed 4 DEFO Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and the side window demisters 5 FLR DEF Floor defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents floor vents and the side window demisters 6 FLOOR Distributes outside air through the floor vents 7 VENT Distributes outside air through the instrument pane
207. ing position e Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to help prevent accidental unbuckling e Place vehicle seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to Step 5 below This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 128 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together
208. interval to help ensure your vehicle keeps running great Multi point inspection Recommended at every visit Check and top up fluid levels brake coolant recovery reservoir manual and automatic transmission if equipped with an underhood dipstick power steering if equipped and window washer Inspect tires for wear and check air pressure including spare Check exhaust system for leaks damage loose parts and foreign material Check battery performance Check operation of horn exterior lamps turn signals and hazard warning lights Check radiator coolers heater and air conditioning hoses Inspect windshield washer spray and wiper operation Check windshield for cracks chips and pitting Inspect for oil and fluid leaks Inspect engine air filter Inspect half shaft dust boots if equipped Check shocks and struts and other suspension components for leaks and damage Inspect steering and linkage Inspect accessory drive belt s Inspect clutch operation if equipped OUUDUUUDUOUUUUUU O Be sure to ask your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership service advisor or technician about the multi point vehicle inspection It s a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle It s your checklist that gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle You ll know what s been checked what s okay 307 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guid
209. ion 94 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been activated REAR SEATS Seat mounted cup holders and armrest storage compartment if equipped To access the cup holders fold the armrest down WARNING Use only soft cups in the cup holder Hard objects can injure you in a collision SAFETY RESTRAINTS Personal Safety System The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of the following items e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints e Front safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors and safety belt usage sensors e Driver s seat position sensor e Front crash severity sensor e Front passenger sensing system Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp 95 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Restraints Control Module RCM with impact and safing sensors e Restraint
210. is lit it is possible that the person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens e Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position e Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended 116 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger s frontal airbag e If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat Pass Airbag Off Disabled Small child in child Lit Disabled safety seat or booster Small child with safety Lit Disabled belt buckled or unbuckled WARNING Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it s very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts
211. ith RDS ON press MENU until the program type menu is displayed One of the various program types will appear Press a SEL TEXT b to scroll through music types Press SEEK or SCAN to search fora station playing the reguested music category Show TYPE Selects between displaying the station s call letters or music format when RDS is enabled Press MENU until SHOW XX appears in the display Press to select NAME or TYPE Compression Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press MENU until compression status is displayed Press lt q SEL TEXT b to enable the compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed Press the SEL control again to disable the feature when COMPRESS ON is displayed When activated the compression icon will illuminate in the display 38 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Occupancy mode if equipped Press MENU until occupancy mode appears in the display Press lt q SEL TEXT p to select ALL SEATS DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS occupancy mode Autoset Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Press MENU until AUTOSET appears in the display Press lt q SEL TEXT gt to turn ON or OFF When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the syste
212. its 3 Maximum Load Dual Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 154 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is RAR 295180018 105m intended for temporary service on Zs J cars SUVs minivans and light Ly 1S4 09 OL 3308 trucks asn WE 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial typ
213. ituation that may or may not affect the deployment of airbags Without the benefit of crash tests on vehicles equipped with push bumpers there are a number of different styles available it is Ford s opinion that installation of some push bumpers could affect the timing of the airbag deployment Use of a push bumper that mounts solely to the vehicles bumper should not have a significant effect upon airbag deployment 296 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Is there a problem with transporting a front seat passenger who has their hands restrained behind their body This is not a normal riding position for an occupant The effectiveness of the passenger airbag will depend in part upon the occupant s seated position It is recommended that the seat should be adjusted as far rearward as possible for this situation and that the occupant sit as upright as possible and be properly safety belted It is recommended that such passengers be properly restrained in the rear seat if at all possible Can conditions encountered in aggressive pursuit driving situations e g high speed braking uneven road surfaces cause inadvertent inflation of an airbag that might result in loss of vehicle control No Aggressive pursuit driving conditions do not fit this criteria Airbags are designed to deploy in moderate to major frontal crashes based on the detection of sudden deceleration by sensors
214. ity of winter grade ethanol As the outside temperature approaches freezing ethanol fuel distributors should supply winter grade ethanol same as with unleaded gasoline If summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions 0 F to 32 F 18 C to 0 C you may experience increased cranking times rough idle or hesitation until the engine has warmed up 174 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is cold when operating on Egs ethanol Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter damage may occur If the engine fails to start turn the key to off and wait 30 seconds before trying again Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible personal injury If you should experience cold weather starting problems on Eg ethanol and neither an alternative brand of Eg ethanol nor an engine block heater is available the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will improve cold starting performance Your vehicle is designed to operate on Egs ethanol alone unleaded gasoline alone or any mixture of the two See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on ethanol If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions flexible fuel vehicles only 1 Press and
215. ive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 208 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed equipment Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure If equipped with an air suspension system the air suspension control in the luggage compartment must be turned to the off position before your vehicle can be towed If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle 209 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Emergency towing In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle your
216. iver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 lb 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 Ib 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1 400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1 400 1 100 150 150 Ib Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to tran
217. l Police Interceptor Equipment packages the connector will already be used by the supplied wig wag module that comes with the option package Note Use of the wig wag feature overrides normal operation of the high beam headlights including flash to pass However the low beam headlights will remain on and unaffected HEAVY DUTY SUSPENSION POLICE This option includes certain heavy duty components that contribute to the vehicle s stability and road handling capability under extremes of operation The police vehicle has a heavy duty steering gear extra control shock absorbers and heavy duty front and rear stabilizer bars COOLERS It is strongly recommended that auxiliary devices such as lights not be installed at the grille Such devices will reduce airflow through the grille and could potentially impact the cooling system performance Oil cooler police The 4 6L engine has an engine oil cooler to maintain engine oil temperatures Engine and transmission coolers External transmission and power steering coolers are located behind the grille and in front of the radiator It is strongly recommended that 273 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty auxiliary devices such as lights and sirens not be installed in the air path of these coolers as they will impact cooling system performance WHEELS TIRES BRAKES Wheel rims police To withstand the demands placed on vehicl
218. l illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional When the front passenger seat is not occupied empty seat or in the event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate the indicator lamp will be unlit The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected e When the front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passenger frontal airbag the indicator lamp will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled e If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not lit then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat e When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp
219. l on each remote transmitter the door will lock and unlock If programming multiple remote transmitters you must press the control buttons on each remote transmitter within seven seconds of each other to remain in programming mode When completed turn the ignition to 1 off All transmitters must be programmed at the same time e When completed turn the ignition to the 1 on position and wait at least 20 seconds in order to use the recently programmed transmitter s e All transmitters must be programmed during the same programming cycle A transmitter that is not programmed within the same programming cycle will be erased and will no longer operate your vehicle s locks If this occurs you will have to reprogram all the transmitters again as you cannot just add a transmitter Illuminated entry The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door s or sound the personal alarm The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if e the ignition switch is turned to the on or the accessory positions or e the remote transmitter lock control is pressed or e after 25 seconds of illumination The dome lamp control must not be set to the off position for the illuminated entry system to operate The inside lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or e any door is open 79 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA
220. l reference line e 5 Center of headlamps e 6 Center line of the vehicle 2 The center of the headlamp is marked either on the lens a circle or cross marker or on the bulb shield internal to the lamp mark or feature Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the ground 2 and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter long horizontal line on the wall or screen 1 at this height masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps and open the hood 4 Locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern and place the top edge of the intensity zone even with the horizontal reference line 4 If the top edge of the high intensity area is not even with the horizontal line follow the next step to adjust it 5 Locate the vertical adjuster for each headlamp Adjust the aim by turning the adjuster control either clockwise to adjust down or counterclockwise to adjust up 6 In addition to the horizontal line marked in step 2 a pair of vertical lines 5 must be marked at the center line of the headlamps on the wall or screen 7 On the wall or screen locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment If the left edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line follow the next step to adjust it 49 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing
221. l vents 8 NORM A C Uses outside air to cool the vehicle Air flows from the instrument panel vents only 9 MAX A C Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle Air flows from the instrument panel vents only This mode will help prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle 10 OUTSIDE TEMP Press to display the outside temperature It will remain in the display until pressed again The temperature will be most accurate when the vehicle is in motion 11 Temperature control Press this control to select the temperature The display window indicates the selected temperature Fahrenheit Celsius temperature Press MAX A C and DEF 7 simultaneously to toggle between Fahrenheit and Celsius temperature The set point temperatures in Celsius will be displayed in half degree increments Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the G7 position e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the air flow selector in OFF or MAX A C e Under normal weather conditions do not leave the air flow selector in MAX A C or OFF when the vehicle is parked This allows the vehicle to breathe using the outside air inlet vents e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e A small amount of air may be felt fr
222. lace timing belt can cause internal engine damage Mnitial replacement at 105 000 miles 160 000 km or 72 months every 45 000 miles 72 000 km or 36 months thereafter Perform a follow up inspection at 120 000 miles 192 000 km 312 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance schedule log DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace Scheduled Maintenance Guide Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace Deater VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace 313 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace 314 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATI
223. larly if you are unbelted The people Im with don t Set the example teen deaths occur 4 wear belts times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see T have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers Td rather be thrown clear Not a good idea People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE GAN T PICK OUR CRASH WARNING Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s airbag system One time disable If at any time the driver front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles the safety belt for that seating position the Belt Minder is disabled for the current ignition cycle The Belt Minder feature will enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds Confirmation is not given for the one time disable 108 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature The driver and front passenger Belt Minder are deactivated activated independently When deactivating activating one seating positio
224. le hour 5 013 miles In metric units this calculation would be 4 828 kilometers 61 idle hours x 53 km idle hour 8 061 km 269 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty REAR AXLE Axle break in Police and middle eastern countries only Rear axles in vehicles destined for use by police or in middle eastern countries are equipped with a synthetic lubricant Do not drive over 100 mph 160 km h for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km to allow axle components to wear in Additionally only synthetic lubricant as specified below should be used when maintenance is performed on the rear axle Lubricant specifications Item Ford part Ford part Ford name number specification Rear axle Motorcraft SAE XY 75W140 QL WSL M2C192 A lubricant 75W 140 High Performance Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant ELECTRICAL Battery police The Motorcraft maintenance free battery normally does not require additional water during its life However for severe service usage or in high temperature climates the electrolyte level should be checked at least every five months or 5 000 miles 8 000 km If the electrolyte level is below the level indicator in any cell add enough pure water to bring the level up to the indicator Never add electrolyte battery acid to the battery as this could shorten battery life Battery long term storage Make sure that the battery is fully charged before
225. left right speakers FADE Press FADE then press A SEL b to shift sound to the rear front speakers 8 SEL Use with Bass Treble as Balance Fade and other menu functions 9 MENU Press MENU to access the following functions Autoset Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Press MENU until AUTOSET appears in the display Press amp SEL to turn ON or OFF When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations 29 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems the system will store the last one in the remaining presets When activated AUTOSET will momentarily appear in the display when any of the preset controls are pressed Compression Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press MENU until compression status is displayed Press gt SEL gt to enable the compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed Press SEL again to disable the feature when COMPRESS ON is displayed When activated the compression icon will appear in the display Speed sensitive volume Radio volume changes automatically and slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 1 3 Level 0 turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum
226. ll not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Your service brakes are self adjusting Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for scheduled maintenance Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a performance concern with the vehicle s brake system In normal operation automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied Such noises are usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning 177 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving however they may be heard at any time while braking and can be aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold heat moisture road dust salt or mud If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present while braking the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Brake system warning light in the Warning lights and chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter for information BRAKE A WARNING If you are driving down a long or steep hill shift to a lower gear Do not apply your brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effec
227. lling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 30 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature 255 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick and the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C on a level surface The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 30 km of driving You
228. ls such as gasoline and ethanol are highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours e Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury e Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury e Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation e Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline and or ethanol vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction e FFV fuel tanks m
229. lt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings below also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is generally best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use 139 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the
230. ly checking the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type 254 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications BRAKE FLUID The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced Fluid levels below the MAX line that do not trigger the brake system warning lamp are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of your brake system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating temperature approximately 20 miles 80 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pu
231. m will store the last one in the remaining presets When activated AUTOSET will appear in the display when any of the preset controls are pressed Speed sensitive volume Radio volume changes automatically and slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 1 3 Level 0 turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting Press MENU to access and use lt q SEL TEXT gt to adjust the volume setting The level will appear in the display Setting the clock Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is displayed Press lt SEL TEXT B to increase decrease the hours minutes Press MENU again to disengage clock mode 10 Memory presets To set a C station Select frequency band tune to a station press and hold a preset button until sound returns In CD mode press to select a specific CD to play 11 On Off Volume Press to turn on off turn to adjust the volume Z A levels Note With the ignition off you may press the volume control to momentarily view the clock 12 LOAD Press to load a CD Press LOAD and a specific preset to load in that particular slot Available slots are indicated by small flashing indicators in the display When the system is ready to accept a disc LOAD CD X will appear in the display Load the CD Press and hold to autoload up to 6 discs Note Ensure that the system is ready to accept the CD Do not force the disc into the CD slot as damage coul
232. mblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions center seating use The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 578 mm 23 inches apart The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position LATCH compatible child seats with attachments on belt webbing can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a prope
233. mbly from the vehicle 4 Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise then pulling it out of the lamp assembly 5 Pull the bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb 6 Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly by rotating it clockwise 7 Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle with three nuts ensuring the nuts are flush with the body to prevent water from entering the trunk 8 Carefully push the carpet back in to place and install the retainer Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1 Make sure headlamp switch is in A7 E mee the off position then remove two screws grommets and the license plate lamp assembly from the trunk hi Ay 2 Carefully pull the bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb 3 Install the lamp assembly on r trunk lid with two grommets rf ensuring the grommets are pushed all the way into the trunk lid and secure with two screws 57 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing backup lamp bulbs 1 Open trunk and remove bulb ea socket from the trunk lid by turning counterclockwise A 2 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb 3 Install the bulb socket in trunk lid fe by turning clockwise Replacing high mount brakelamp bulbs 1 Remove two screws from the lamp assembly 2 Carefully lift the lamp assembly up for access to the bulbs 3 Carefully pull the bulb socket
234. mbol Glossary Payee WONS a Power Window Lockout BAY Front Rear Child Safety Door Interior Luggage i Lock Unlock Compartment Release Panic Alarm s Engine Oil TEA Engine Coolant Temperature E yr Engine Coolant Da DOPO Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid Bi Level Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter DE pee Compartment a Tack lt gt Check Fuel Cap Ri ri m 0 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 11 Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES IAI 40 Standard instrument cluster Loy Silas 5 RPM 1000 6 amp 9 m te odo Optional instrument cluster Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulb works If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for additional information 12 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Service Engine Soon The Service Engine Soon indicator light C5 illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the on position to check
235. mediately it may take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light RA or CHECK FUEL CAP message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city and highway driving Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light amp or CHECK FUEL CAP message on may cause the C light to turn on as well If you must replace the fuel filler cap replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford Motorcraft or other certified fuel filler cap is not used WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others WARNING If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in personal injury FFV Flex Fuel Vehicle fuel cap If your vehicle is FFV capable it will have a yellow colored fuel cap 245 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Crown Victoria vehicles only bp Choosing the right fuel If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle FFV use only UNLEADED FUEL and FUE
236. mes with two coded keys additional coded keys may be purchased from your authorized dealer The authorized dealer can program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded key but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition to the off position remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is the flashing red indicator located on top of the dash panel to the left of the steering wheel e When the ignition is in the off position the indicator will flash once every two seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a the
237. more common moderate severity impacts A higher energy level is used for the most severe impacts Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints SRS section in this chapter Front crash severity sensor The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the severity of an impact Positioned up front it provides valuable information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact This allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the dual stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners Driver s seat position sensor The driver s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the deployment level of the driver dual stage airbag based on seat position The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level 96 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Front passenger sensing system For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close to the airbag when it begins to inflate For some occupants like infants in rear facing child seats this occurs because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag For other occupants this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or
238. mp assembly 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 5 Pull the bulb from the socket and Aa push in the new bulb 6 Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly by rotating it clockwise To complete installation follow the removal procedure in reverse order Replacing front sidemarker bulb To remove the front side marker bulb 1 Make sure headlamp switch is in the off position then open the hood 2 Remove the radiator cover by turning the three retainers to the unlock position 3 Remove the screw from the outside of the lamp 4 Remove the nut from inside the lamp and pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle 5 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly 6 Carefully pull bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb until it snaps locking it into position B gt 7 To complete installation follow the removal procedure in reverse order Replacing tail brake turn signal lamp bulbs The tail lamp and brake turn signal lamp bulbs are located in the tail lamp assembly Follow the same steps to replace either bulb 56 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position then open the trunk and remove the retainer 2 Carefully pull the carpet away to expose the lamp assembly hardware 3 Remove three nuts and the lamp asse
239. must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off e After Step 3 the restraint system warning light airbag light will be turned on for three seconds 109 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 4 Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled As confirmation the restraint system warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds e This will enable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled As confirmation the restraint system warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds followed by three seconds with the light off then followed by the restraint system warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS Important SRS precautions The SRS is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag 110 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNIN
240. n do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Read Steps 1 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation activation programming procedure Note The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features must be disabled enabled separately Both cannot be disabled enabled during the same key cycle The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e The parking brake is set e The gearshift is in P Park e The ignition switch is in the off position e The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled WARNING While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch to the on position DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off Approximately one minute e Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off 3 For the seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the safety belt nine times at a moderate speed ending in the unbuckled state Step 3
241. n 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled 249 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy Habits e Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 10 savings in fuel e Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy e Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel e Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop e Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy e Slow down gradually e Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h e Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy e Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy e You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs U
242. n Mexico www ford com mx e In Australia www ford com au Additional owner information is given in separate publications This vehicle s Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on this vehicle s Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle WARNING Fuel pump shut off switch In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration e g collision when parking To reset the switch refer to the Fuel pump shut off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before Lil touching or attempting adjustment of any kind Protecting the environment We must all play our part in
243. n Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the section 47rbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag Notice to owners of Severe Duty vehicles Crown Victoria only Before you drive your vehicle be sure to read the Crown Victoria Severe Duty chapter This chapter contains important operation and maintenance information DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems
244. n hilly terrain e Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal e Close windows for high speed driving EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system 251 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system whic
245. n severe personal injuries in the event of a collision l WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid 90 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To adjust the front seatback using the manual recliner e Lift and hold the handle located on the side of the seat e Lean against the seatback to adjust it to your desired position You can recline the seat back or bring it forward e Release the handle when the desired position has been reached Adjusting the power front seats if equipped The controls for the power seats are located on the inside of each front door in WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving A WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a collision or sudden stop fh WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips fp WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor 91 2011 Crown Vict
246. nd 2 Tune Press lt Q P gt to manually ra change radio frequency down up _ 26 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 3 AM FM Press to choose a frequency band in radio mode amem 4 Memory preset buttons To set a station Select frequency band 3 2 2 4 AM FM tune to a station press and hold a preset button until sound returns 5 Power volume Press to turn ON OFF turn to increase or decrease volume levels 6 Tone Press TONE until the desired level Bass Treble Fade appears on the display Turn the volume control to raise lower the levels or to move the audio sound from the right to left or the front to back if equipped 7 CLK Clock To set the hour press and hold CLK until CLOCK SET appears in the display Continue to hold CLK as you press SEEK to decrease lt q or increase gt the hours To set the minute press and hold CLK until CLOCK set appears in the display Continue to hold CLK as you press TUNE to decrease dor increase gt the minutes 27 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems AM FM Stereo Single CD Premium audio system if equipped ele 2 _ JE 45 eto IFS O WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any de
247. nd a loss of braking confidence during subsequent pursuit driving Ford recommends that police fleets replace the brake fluid at every brake pad service interval Brake fluid may be replaced more frequently on vehicles involved in frequent high speed pursuits with heavy brake usage INTERIOR Heavy duty seats police The front seat assemblies including the seat adjustment mechanisms and supports are ruggedly designed and ensure working comfort An anti stab plate is integrated into the seat back to reduce the risk of officer injury An adjustable power lumbar system is standard on the driver s seat Seat belt extenders Some police departments have begun employing the use of seat belt extenders to make the practice of buckling and unbuckling seat belts easier for officers wearing hip mounted radios side arms etc Seat belt extenders should never be worn when the lap strap will not adjust snugly on the hips and or when the intersection of the lap belt 279 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty and shoulder belt straps measured along the lap strap is less than six 6 inches 15 cm from an imaginary center line of the occupant s body WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso Calibrated speedometer police Deviations from true road speeds are minimized by a calibrated speedometer head which gives both miles per hour 0
248. nd start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6 Release the parking brake With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A C on put the vehicle in D Drive and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 7 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy along with the ethanol content for flexible fuel vehicles e If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned e For flexible fuel vehicles if you are operating on E85 you may experience poor starts or an inability to start the engine and driveability problems until the fuel trim and ethanol content have been relearned 234 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected e Always dispose of automotive a batteries in a responsible manner S Follow your local authorized Y A standards for disposal Call your t local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotiv
249. ne components 220 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo CXC 66 A e Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running water in the running engine may cause internal damage e Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These products are available from your authorized dealer e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 221 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellent coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of
250. ng System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less than one quarter full Check the washer fluid level Refer to Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10 or less OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0 An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and according to the recommended maintenance schedule Use only recommended engine oils 25 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS AM FM stereo if equipped TONE VOL GD mev De lt SEEK gt A il lt TUNE gt MOTO OC 42 WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws 1 Seek Press lt q P gt to find the lt q SEK p gt next strong station down up the frequency ba
251. ng with loss of front braking traction Using ABS e In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four wheel ABS is required apply continuous force on the brake The four wheel ABS will be activated immediately thus allowing you to retain steering control of your vehicle and providing there is sufficient space will enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a controlled stop e The anti lock system does not reduce stopping distance Always leave enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to stop e We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking technique However avoid taking any unnecessary risks ABS warning lamp The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate momentarily at start up remains on or continues to flash the ABS needs to be serviced With the ABS light on the anti lock brake system is disabled and normal braking is still effective unless the brake warning light also remains BRAKE illuminated with parking brake released If your brake warning lamp illuminates have your vehicle serviced immediately 179 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Parking brake Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked To set the parking brake 1 Move the gearshift to P Park 2 Press pedal downward The BRAKE warnin
252. nnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy e Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy e Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy e Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance e Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size e Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy e Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter 250 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance information Conditions e Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed e Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 Ib 180 kg of weight carried e Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski racks may reduce fuel economy e Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy e Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving e Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving o
253. nts The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions swelling or temporary hearing loss Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control The SRS consists of the following items e Driver and passenger airbag modules which include the inflators and airbags e safety belt pretensioners e Front passenger sensing system e Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter e Driver and passenger side airbags e Seat mounted side ai
254. nu options by pressing any other audio control 8 Cassette Insert a cassette facing to the right 9 TUNE Press to manually go up or down the radio frequency CAT CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio Your system may be equipped with Satellite ready capability The kit to enable Satellite reception is available through your dealer Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit Check with your authorized dealer for availability 10 Side 1 2 Press to access the next side of the cassette tape The display will indicate whether TAPE 1 or TAPE 2 is playing 34 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 11 SEEK Press to access the next previous radio station tape selection or CD track 12 REW Rewind Press to rewind in tape or CD mode FF Fast forward Press to fast forward in tape or CD mode 13 SCAN Press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of radio stations selections or CD tracks Press again to stop 14 SHUF Shuffle Press to play the tracks on the current CD in random order Press again to stop 15 Memory presets To set a station Select frequency band tune to a station press and hold a preset button until sound returns 16 AM FM Press to switch between AM FM1 FM2 modes g ef BE HERE SIDE1 2 6 17 Tape eject Press to eject the tape 18 CD TAPE Press to switch between CD and TAPE
255. ny reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1
256. o Heated outside mirrors in the Driver Controls chapter Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and will not be covered by your warranty 45 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights HEADLAMP CONTROL Turns the lamps off SOCE Turns on the parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps ZD Turns the headlamps on Autolamp control if equipped The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for a predetermined period of time after the ignition switch is turned to off The delay period can be adjusted up to a maximum of approximately three minutes in duration e To turn autolamps on rotate the control counterclockwise to the next position from off e To turn autolamps off rotate the control clockwise The headlamps will also turn on when the wipers are turned on To change the duration of the autolamp delay perform the following sequence Note Steps 2 through 5 must be carried out within a 10 second period 1 Start with the ignition switch in the off position and the headlamp switch in the autolamp position 2 Place the headlamp switch in the off position 3
257. o bey oram Service Advisor Technician me aas wes cas 308 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG The following section contains the Normal Schedule This schedule is presented at specific mileage kilometer intervals with exceptions noted 309 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide gt 10 N BE ISIH S9U109 IOASUPTY AA x Cp e EIL CEE sgUnJy 952913 yy p ddmb JL Pouqn syurof N pue Yeys Alp spu pol on uorsu dsns squtof reg ogey 3UL1991S 799dSUJ a DD A CPEE ee SONS oN pe TRA yen HR pue Y13U91 S 10J waysks Fuyoo sugua ayelq Sued pue sosoy SBUTUTJ ayerq SUMIP S10701 saoys sped yerq yoodsuy t sjuswermbel JO 19Jeop yNsuoD Yonsd p e y m podd nbo JD paa pny UOTSSTUISURI oyewome 799dSUJ popugurul0991 uoy dsur qurod ymu wIo g 321p 10 SS9U9S00 Team ISTOU TeuLlouge 10J Syu9uodulo9 p r pue sjeoym 499dSuJ y dap peel mse ur pue J29M 911 yoodsut S 97e10Y Jay pue po oulsue asueyD 000 T X StoyoWOTLY 000 T X SNWN ice ya N ENE vi vi ts oO x 310 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Crown Victoria cro USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide SII S9U109 19A9YOTUAM x SE
258. o leaks and fluids are at recommended levels e If the battery was removed clean the battery cable ends and inspect If you have any concerns or issues contact your authorized dealer 260 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS Sex j For spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used 261 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications JIEN UOTyeOYT IND IdV UM V 0 amp 606NW SSM Cepeuey GISATOGME OX0 epeueD GI dS TOGMS OX0 SM SA 0ZMS OX e SM dS 02MS 0Xe 1 V ISEL6N SSM epeuep q 2 OA0 SM SAA VVdETW ASA 9 IX TV 9999W SSM 10 W G9O9IN SSM O T Wd uoT VITFIV0ds p104 ogunu Ied pIo z epeue9 TO I0JO0OW Moy WAS YZ MG AVS e HE10JON e Cepeue TO 1010 unruolg ANS 02 MS AVS e Ht10JOWN e SN TO 1090W M YJU S MA OZMS AVS JJeII0 0W Sn TO JOJOW puolg IN YJU S UMNTUaT 06 MS AVS oYeIIoJoNW e pa10J09 M0 194 JuR OOD 9UlBUN Ploy UNTIL 617E1910 ON YUBOLUGuJ Aeidg
259. o the rear window defroster s heated grid lines INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection 222 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens e Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces If a spill occurs wipe off immediately Damage may not be covered by your warranty WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth F
260. ocation Rating Spot lights Police vehicles only 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits 10A Powertrain control module PCM O amman Cause vent 25A Police tray lamps Police vehicles only Instrument panel power point 14 20A Stop lamp switch gt 15A Fog lamps Grand Marquis only Police accessory battery feed 1 Police vehicles only Heated seats Grand Marquis only Police accessory battery feed 2 Police vehicles only only only Powertrain loads and sensors outputs Police vehicles only 20A Police PDB outputs Police vehicles only 1 3 4 5 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 96 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Rating 10A Heated mirrors Rear defrost indicator 50A Instrument panel I P fuse box feed ME 1 I P fuses 10 12 14 16 and 18 Instrument panel I P fuse box feed 2 I P fuses 2 4 6 8 19 21 23 and 25 40A Anti lock brake system ABS module Pump xK 40A Rear defroster relay feed Cigar lighter Non police vehicles only Police accessory battery feed 3 Police vehicles only e ABS module Valves battery feed Police vehicles only vehicles only Police light bar or Police right hand kick panel accessory battery feed Poli
261. of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running e Use the same filling rate setting low medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating e Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added Gn gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculatio
262. om the floor vent regardless of the air distribution setting that is selected 44 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C in the MAX A C position reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the vehicle s transmission into the park gear position to continue to receive cool air from your A C system To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select NORM A C 2 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 3 Set the fan speed to HI 4 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER Gp The rear defroster control is located on the instrument panel Press the rear defroster control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog A small LED will illuminate when the rear defroster is activated The ignition must be in the on position to operate the rear window defroster The defroster turns off automatically after a predetermined amount of time or when the ignition is turned off To manually turn off the defroster press the control again Activating the rear window defroster will also activate the heated mirrors if equipped For more information refer t
263. oncerning your tire pressure monitoring system 158 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Low tire pressure Possible cause Customer action required warning light Solid warning light Tire s under inflated Spare tire in use TPMS malfunction 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 1 Check your tire pressure to ensure tires are properly inflated refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 82 km h before the light will turn off Your temporary spare tire is in use This includes the optional full sized matching wheel and tire Repair the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section If your tires are properly inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the light remains on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer 159 Tires Wheels and Loading Low tire pressure Possible cause Customer action required warning light Flashing warning Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in light use This include
264. ond gear at the appropriate vehicle speed 1 First e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever e Will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds allows for 1 First when vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in Overdrive or Drive e Press the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts ina steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat 186 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through o water that is higher than the bottom S7 of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water whe
265. oner are available at the King Ranch Saddle Shop Visit the website at www krsaddleshop com or telephone in the United States 1 800 282 KING 5464 If you are unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner use another premium leather conditioner e Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section e Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel sized amount of conditioner to a clean dry cloth e Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears Allow the conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior If a film appears wipe off film with a dry clean cloth UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt 225 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC
266. oor locks can also be turned on off through the following procedure You must complete Steps 1 7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated you must wait at least 30 seconds Note Before following the procedure make sure that the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors the hood and the decklid are closed 1 Turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position 6 The door locks will lock unlock to confirm programming mode is entered active 7 With the ignition still in the on position for the autolock feature press the unlock control once then press the lock control once The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autolock was activated For the autounlock feature press the lock control once then press the unlock control once The horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autounlock was activated If any door the hood or the deck lid is open the horn will chirp twice and the procedure will need to be performed again 73 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 8 After having w
267. or Metric Press SELECT to change the display units e ENGLISH e METRIC LANGUAGE Displays the current language selected Press SELECT to change the display language e ENGLISH e ESPANOL e FRANCAIS OIL LIFE START VALUE PRESS SELECT TO CHANGE Press SELECT to change the oil life start value OIL LIFE START VALUE SET TO XXX will be displayed To reset the oil monitoring system to 100 after each oil change approximately 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months perform the following 1 Press and hold the RESET control for two seconds and release Oil life is set to 100 and OIL LIFE XXX HOLD RESET IF NEW OIL is displayed 2 Press and hold the RESET control for three seconds and release Oil life is set to 100 and OIL LIFE START VALUE SET TO XXX is displayed System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages This allows you to use the full functionality of the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the RESET control and clearing the warning message 23 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Warning messages that have been reset a
268. or more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors 3 If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 e If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 223 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials
269. oria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints N WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map pocket if eguipped when a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console if eguipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag status Refer to Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section for additional details Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system Press the control to recline the gt seatback forward or backward A lt A v b Press to move the seat forward or backward gt 92 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Press to move the front portion of the seat cushion up or down v Press to move the rear portion of the seat cushion up or down Using the power lumbar support if equipped The power lumbar control is located on the front inboard side of the seat O Press the top side of the control to adjust firmness Press the bottom side of the control to adjust softness 93 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Heated seats
270. orn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used 146 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with t
271. osts Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that routinely wear out The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention for normal wear e Wiper blades e Brake pads and linings Spark pinge except e Shock absorbers California e Clutch disc e Belts and hoses Contact your selling Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget Interest free finance options available Take advantage of our installment payment plan just a 10 down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest no fee payment opportunity 301 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan IWAW 3 diz JLV1S ALIO ON LdV ssayqqv LNIdd SSV31d SINWN 66 89084 IN 20 e4oy cZ08 xog O d dS31 P4104 0 SIU IEW pue mojaq UO EWJOJU BU 9J9Jdu109 aow WE0 oL idSJF P404 YUM DUA 40 3983d BUINUAY Jag 302 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Crown Victoria cro USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS CANADA ONLY You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extende
272. ot leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used 65 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls POWER WINDOWS WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings Press and pull the window switches to open and close windows e Press down to the first detent and hold the switch to open AUTO e Pull up to the first detent and hold the switch to close One touch down Allows the driver s window to open fully without holding the control down Press the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation Window lock The window lock feature allows only the driver to operate the power windows To lock out all the window controls except for the driver s press the right side of the control Press the left side to restore the window controls Accessory delay With accessory delay the power window switches and radio may be u
273. ours x 33 miles 53 kmJ idle hour 5 013 miles 8 067 km 319 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads Inspect frequently service as Replace cabin air filter if equipped required Replace engine air filter Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Rotate tires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or Change engine oil and replace oil filter 6 months Inspect and lubricate U joints Every 15 000 miles 24 000 km Replace fuel filter Crown Victoria Grand Marquis and Town Car Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid not required on 6R80 transmission Every 50 000 miles 80 000 km Change manual transmission fluid Exclusive use of E85 Flex Fuel Vehicles only Every oil change interval If ran exclusively on 85 fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel 320 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Special operating condition log DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope
274. out of the lamp assembly 4 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb To install reverse the removal procedure 58 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing headlamp bulbs Grand Marquis only To remove the headlamp bulb 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position then open the hood 2 Remove the three pin type retainers and the radiator sight shield 3 Remove the front parking lamp assembly Refer to Replacing front parking cornering turn signal lamp bulbs in this section 4 Remove the headlamp retainer bolts and the headlamp assembly 5 Disconnect the electrical connector 6 Remove the old headlamp bulb by rotating it counterclockwise then pull it out 7 To install reverse the removal procedure Re aiming the headlamps may be necessary For additional information refer to the headlamp aiming section in this chapter WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated Note If the bulb is accidentally touched it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used Note The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a replacement bulb is installed Removing the bulb for
275. p assembly condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens Examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak are e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America and an 52 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn tim
276. pon engineering testing Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacement parts Parts other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized remanufactured 304 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide parts that are used for maintenance replacement or for the service of components affecting emission control must be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability It is the owner s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete warranty information Non Ford approved chemicals or additives are not required for factory recommended maintenance In fact Ford Motor Company recommends against the use of such additive products unless specifically recommended by Ford for a particular application Oil fluids and flushing In many cases fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and by itself does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed However discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a q
277. pped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required information and warnings 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert Fasten Safety Belt Airbag Side Child Seat Tether Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System Master Lighting Switch Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Defrost Demist 10 AN A xe il a O CA See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Window Defrost Demist E O Q gt DFO en E 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Vehicle Sy
278. pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure e PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure e Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km e Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door e B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door e Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim e Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread e Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle e Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare
279. protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to break in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter 2011 Crow
280. putting the vehicle in storage Disconnect the negative cable if it will be stored for an extended period of time If the battery is discharged allow it to warm to a moderate temperature such as 60 F 16 C and use a battery charger rather than the vehicles charging system to bring the battery back to full charge Use a battery charger designed for commercial use such as the Rotunda GR 1 Never let a fully discharged battery remain discharged for a long period of time Extended storage in a discharge state can cause irrecoverable damage to the internal components or cracking of the container As a battery 270 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty approaches a discharged state it becomes easier for the electrolyte to freeze If it freezes and expands it may crack the battery case Alternator police The high output alternator provides 200 amperes of current to support the high power requirements of modern police equipment Output at idle is approximately 130 amperes Current demand by both the vehicle and all energized police equipment in excess of this amount during vehicle idling will place the electrical system into a discharge condition Electrical power management systems should be applied if necessary to avoid discharging the battery Power distribution connector Power for aftermarket equipment can be obtained from the power distribution connector located under the glov
281. r installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching child safety seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Refer to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children in this chapter 134 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Attaching child safety seats with tether straps il Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available asan accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle The rear seats of your vehicle are eguipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover marked with the tether anchor symbol shown with title The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following position
282. r panel Removing the panels It is important that these panels be removed from the vehicle after the vehicle has been impacted on the protected door the door has been 287 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty shot or the vehicle is being removed from active duty For details on panel removal refer to the Crown Victoria Workshop Manual After removal please contact the following for disposition and recycling instructions Crown North America Division of Leggett and Platt 43 Gaylord Road Unit 2 St Thomas ON Canada N5P 3R9 866 402 6838 When the panels are removed the Ballistic Panel label affixed to the door trim panel must also be removed AIRBAGS Dual driver passenger airbags and side airbags if equipped affect the way police equipment can be mounted in police vehicles Any surfaces that could come into contact with an airbag once it has deployed must not damage the airbag or alter its deployment path Once the airbag has fully deployed any peripheral equipment surfaces that could come into contact with the airbag such as when the airbag deflates with the loading of an occupant must not damage the airbag or alter its deployment path Sharp edges corners or protrusions could damage the nylon airbag material and reduce the effectiveness of the airbag WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment in front of the airbag module cover or in fron
283. r replacement keys Programming spare keys A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle Only SecuriLock keys can be used To program a coded key yourself you will need two previously programmed coded keys Keys that already operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure If two previously programmed coded keys are not available you must bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded key s programmed Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Insert the first previously G programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from 1 off to the 3 on position 2 maintain ignition in 3 on for at 4 least one second 2 Turn ignition to 1 off and remove the first coded key from the ignition 85 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 3 Within ten seconds of removing the first coded key insert the second previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from 1 off to the 3 on position maintain ignition in 3 on for at least one second but no more than ten seconds 4 Turn the ignition to 1 off and remove the second coded key from the ignition 5 Within twenty seconds of removing the second coded Key insert the new unprogrammed key new key into the ignition and turn the igni
284. r tires and wheel valve stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail 145 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn TR down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm Gk VT di When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is w
285. rain leather which is extremely durable but still requires special care and maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort 224 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the leather Cleaning For dirt use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean damp cloth or soft brush For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution e Clean spills as quickly as possible e Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather as cleaners may darken the leather e Do not spill coffee ketchup mustard orange juice or oil based products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl or plastics Scratches Natural Markings Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine steer hides there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings such as small scars These markings give character to the seating covers and should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear marks apply conditioner on the affected area following the same instructions as in the Conditioning section Conditioning Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditi
286. rbag system e One or more impact and safing sensors e A readiness light and tone e A diagnostic module e The electrical wiring which connects the components The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits as well as the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring including the impact 114 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints sensors the system wiring the airbag system readiness light the airbag backup power and the airbag ignitors WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the air bag has deployed the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the air bag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision WARNING If the safety belt pretensioners deploy in an accident they will not function again belt will not extract or retract and must be replaced immediately Failure to replace the retractor assemblies will increase the risk of injury Front passenger sensing system The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and sa
287. re the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 187 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 0 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 30 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no re
288. re divided into three categories e They cannot be reset until the condition is corrected e They will reappear on the display 10 minutes from the reset e They will not reappear until an ignition off on cycle has been completed This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within the vehicle DOOR AJAR Displayed when a door is not completely closed POWERTRAIN MALFUNCTION Displayed when the powertrain is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE Displayed when the engine coolant is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible turn off the engine and let it cool Check the coolant and coolant level Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot CHECK FUEL CAP Displayed when the fuel filler cap is not properly installed Check the fuel filler cap for proper installation Refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter CHECK AIR SUSPENSION Displayed when the air suspension system is not operating properly If this message is displayed while driving pull off the road as soon as safely possible For more information refer to Air suspension system in t
289. recovery e Back up camera e Windshield wiper shaker e Back up alarm eBumper mounted parking e Hitch mounted parking sensor sensors Ford Licensed Accessories FLA are warranted by the accessory manufacturer s warranty Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer s limited warranty and or a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by the accessory manufacturer 298 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qual
290. res and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired 199 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability 3 Full siz
291. res of the air filter cover to the air filter housing are fully engaged when reassembling the air filter assembly Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used VEHICLE STORAGE If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time 30 days or more refer to the following maintenance recommendations to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating condition All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for reliable regular driving Long term storage under various conditions may lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are taken to preserve the components General e Store all vehicles in a dry ventilated place e Protect from sunlight if possible e If vehicles are stored outside they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage Body e Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt grease oil tar or mud from exterior surfaces rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders See the Cleaning chapter for more information e Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations e Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust 258 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to p
292. revent discoloration Re wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed See the Cleaning chapter for more information Lubricate all hood door and trunk lid hinges and latches with a light grade oil See the Cleaning chapter for more information e Cover interior trim to prevent fading e Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents Engine e The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage as used engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage e Start the engine every 15 days Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature e With your foot on the brake shift through all the gears while the engine is running Fuel system e Fill the fuel tank with high quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle Note During extended periods of vehicle storage 80 days or more fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation Add Motorcraft Gas Stabilizer or equivalent meeting Ford material specification ESE M99C112 A to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 30 days Follow the instructions on the additive label The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system Cooling system e Protect against freezing temperatures e When removing vehicle from storage check coolant fluid level Confirm there are no cooling system leaks and fluid is at the recommended level Battery e Check and re
293. ria Workshop Manual 275 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty TPMS reset tips e To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle the TPMS reset procedure should be performed at least three feet one meter away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the TPMS reset procedure at the same time e Do not wait more than two minutes between resetting each tire sensor or the system will time out and the entire procedure will have to be repeated on all four wheels e A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure TPMS reset procedure Note It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before attempting Note To enter the reset mode Steps 1 6 MUST be completed within 60 seconds 1 Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition 2 Press and release the brake pedal 3 Cycle the ignition from off to on three times ending in the on position DO NOT start the engine 276 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty 4 Press and hold the brake pedal for two seconds then release 5 Turn the ignition to off DO NOT remove the key aa Py RX os 6 Cycle the ignition from off to on three times ending in on DO NOT start the engine If the reset mode has been entered successfully the horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator G
294. rical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cord is in good condition before use e Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order to prevent possible shock or fire e Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper and similar items e Be sure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the cord to become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour e Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order How to use the engine block heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use To clean them use a dry cloth Depending on the type of factory installed equipment your engine block heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts of power per hour Your factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after approximately three hours of operation Block heater operation longer than three hours wi
295. ries such as antennas before entering a car wash e Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible Exterior chrome e Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag e Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives 219 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar
296. rk engine oil must be added 4 to raise the level within the normal operating range o A Co RRRS If required add engine oil to the engine Refer to Adding engine oil in this chapter e Do not overfill the engine with oil Oil levels above this mark may cause engine Co RRIS O damage If the engine is overfilled some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer 7 Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise until three clicks can be heard To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed 231 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark PREMIUM SYNTHETI BL MOTOR OIL
297. rk on a level surface set the parking brake and activate hazard flashers 2 Place gearshift lever in P Park and turn engine off 201 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Removing the spare tire and jack 1 Remove the spare tire and the jack The jack could be located e A behind the mini spare tire or e B behind the full size spare tire WARNING On vehicles equipped with air suspension turn off the air suspension switch prior to jacking hoisting or towing your vehicle Refer to Air suspension system in the Driving chapter 2 Remove the lug wrench from the jack Rotate the lug wrench socket out from the handle A Tire change procedure WARNING When one of the front wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the vehicle is in P Park 202 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure the parking brake is set then block in both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull
298. ross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 164 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus e Example only Tires Wheels and Loading MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG REAR GAWR XXXXLI XXXXKG WITH XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX KPa XX PSLCOLD 4f AT XXX KPaXX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXX
299. route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 129 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out a 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked repeat Steps 5 and 6 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight e g by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle Sometimes a slight lean towards
300. rown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 SEEK Press to access the next previous radio station or CD track Press and hold to advance reverse in the current CD track 3 TUNE CAT Press to manually go mad up or down the radio frequency TEXT is only available when eguipped with Satellite radio Your system may be eguipped with Satellite ready capability The kit to enable Satellite reception is available through your dealer Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit Check with your authorized dealer for availability 4 MUTE Press to mute the playing media Press again to retum to the playing media or turn the volume control to adjust the volume 5 Eject Press to eject CD s when a the ignition is on or off Numbers will illuminate in the display indicating which CD slots are loaded with CDs To eject a specific CD press eject and the corresponding preset number If no preset is selected the system will eject the currently selected CD Press and hold to eject all loaded discs Note If the CD is not removed within 15 seconds the system will reload the disc and begin play if the system is on 6 BASS Press BASS then press lt Q SEL TEXT P to 4 decrease increase the level of bass output TREB Treble Press TREB then press amp SEL TEXT P to iz decrease increase the level of treble output 7 BAL Balance Press BAL
301. rward direction to make sure that the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1 inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation 7 Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST Note There is no top tether anchor for the front center seating position See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter Attaching child safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren attachments The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two 2 lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one 1 top tether anchor located behind that seating position 132 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether str
302. s shown from top view 4 8 Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments and have attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat to the tether anchor 1 Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat For vehicles with adjustable head restraints route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback 135 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position 7 A 3 Open the tether anchor cover 4 Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown If the tet
303. s lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the service engine soon C indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon tc indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon C3 indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing 253 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owner
304. s Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid Refer to scheduled maintenance information 1 Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C 2 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 3 Turn the engine off 4 Check the fluid level in the reservoir It should be between the MIN and MAX lines Do not add fluid if the level is in this range 5 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuous
305. s chapter for more information O D off Illuminates when the 0 D overdrive function of the transmission has been turned off OFF refer to the Driving chapter If the light does not illuminate have the transmission serviced soon or damage may occur Speed control if equipped Illuminates when the speed control is activated Turns off when the speed control system is deactivated Illuminates when one of the doors is not completely shut and the ignition is turned to on With the ignition in on position a tone will sound for one second if a door is open Door ajar if equipped 8 16 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the a hazard lights are turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb D Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened GAUGES Be oe lee z P RN 21 E D Speedometer Indicates the willy current vehicle speed Refer to the So ag Message center in this chapter to S Pa 2 change your display to a digital 20 6
306. s depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was travelling and e Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Note EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information e g name gender age and crash location is recorded see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic directions and Information privacy below However parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have such special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder 7 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information
307. s space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover Example only TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL5 FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE me se nomen SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29 PS ADDITIONAL SPARE T145 80D16 420 KPA 60 PSI INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PS XXX XX XXXX XXXX 200000000000000X SEATING CAPACITY 1 TFRONT T REAR NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL 5 yavant 2 3 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT 1 ARRIERE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 492 kg or 1085 Le poids total des occupants et du chargement na doit jamais d pesser kg ou eT cutis Reena soens ee PNEUS A FROID MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 PSI INFORMATION REAR VOIR LE MANUEL P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 PSI DE LUSAGER SPARE POUR PLUS DE sedhrs T145 90R17 415 KPA 60 PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX N ea XXX XX XXXX XXXXA 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 163 Tires Wheels and Loading CARGO Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load weight is also part of cargo weight GAW G
308. s the optional full sized matching wheel and tire Repair the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description of how the system functions under these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire 1s installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly malfunction inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warning light still flashes have the system inspected by your authorized dealer When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 21 kPa for a drop of 30 F 17 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommen
309. s with a scratch protection film attached and CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be inserted into the CD player The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Audio system warranty and service Refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your dealer or qualified technician 41 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 1 Fan speed adjustment Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle ee VENT FLOOR 2 Temperature selection we S Controls the temperature of the a airflow in the vehicle 3 Air flow selections Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle See the following for a brief description on each control MAX A C Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle Air flows from the instrument panel vents only This mode will help prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle NORM A C Uses outside air to cool the vehicle Air flows from the instrument panel vents only VENT Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents OFF Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate
310. sayscsnconesnerecaesceaccneny 48 50 autolamp system 46 bulb specifications 52 daytime running lights 47 flash t BASS versene 47 High BEAM sira asl 47 replacing bulbs 54 59 tumingonandolff 46 Heating heating and air conditioning SVSUGIM K EE 42 43 HOO EE 228 I Td MGR ict mama ia 269 IMION nirio rinira 172 265 Illuminated visor mirror 64 Infant seats see Safety seats 127 Inspection maintenance I M BES ME sarisi sarar sanane 253 Instrument panel CLEANING Sasa sm alli 222 GSO e m mea eet 12 lighting up panel and INGETIOP 530000 psn neria ei 48 J ETE E E EA A OA 199 POSITIONING Ter sei 199 SUOTASE osre iae a EREE 199 Jump starting your vehicle 206 K Keyless entry system 80 AUCOLOCK 5 2cs cede tdancidacemeciets ER 72 keypad A A weapecacace 80 programming entry code 80 KEYS cs tasks sehadet mana rma dens 72 85 positions of the ignition 172 L Lamps autolamp system 46 bulb replacement specifications chart 52 daytime running light 47 fog lamps 47 headlamps 46 headlamps flash to pass 47 instrument panel dimming 48 interior lamps 51 53 Police red white map light 280
311. sed for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off or until any door is opened INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side 66 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror if equipped The interior rear view mirror has an auto dimming function The electronic day night mirror will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the mirror When the mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle it will automatically adjust darken to minimize glare The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance Note A rear center passenger and or raised rear center headrest Cif equipped may also block the light from reaching the sensor Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors E WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
312. sed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Note Do not attach the negative cable to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 207 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the posit
313. ses the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 156 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing
314. sport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 5 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 Ib 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 Ib 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1 400 440 1 200 240 lb No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the 167 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 Ib 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1 400 440 900 60 Ib Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
315. ssfully locking was not complete The park taillamps will not flash if any door is ajar Car finder Press A twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the park lamps tail lamps will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a panic alarm Press lt on the remote transmitter to activate the alarm Note The panic alarm only works with the ignition in the off position Press a second time to deactivate the alarm You may also deactivate the alarm by turning the ignition to the on position Opening the trunk qm Press L once to open the trunk e Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your vehicle Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall out or block the driver s rear view This feature will not work with a vehicle speed greater than 3 mph km h if the ignition is in the accessory or on position Replacing the battery The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent tht 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security To replace the battery 1 Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the remote entry transmitter near the key ring DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF THE REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER 2 Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back surf
316. stem is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 82 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Radio type approval numbers for Immobilizer System PATS XCVR If the type approval of your immobilizer system is inspected in one of the countries listed in the following table refer to the corresponding approval number TX Frequency 134 2 kHz Country Name American Samoa USA Bahrain Barbados Canada China Ghana Guam USA Jordan Kenya Kuwait Mauritius Mayotte F Mexico Morocco Netherlands Antilles NL Nicaragua Northern Mariana Islands Oman Puerto Rico Qatar Saudi Arabia South Korea Uruguay 025 FR 2003 83 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Your vehicle co
317. suog poy ayelg spTyaA I0JOW LOG 99uruojlag USTH JLI ON yuo9jea mb 10 9U2LU Ied pIo T29 s tenb 09 T921 syrenb 9 8T quejooo SUTBUN IOAJ9S91 UO YYW pue NIW U99M19g N sJILI9VdY ANY SNOILVOISIDAdS LONGOYd J NYNALNIVN p ny oyelg Ne N Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Crown Victoria cro USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Cepeue9 pmi ZV 9TASW ASM 10524 POTISPUL epeued ygenp umud Qa pwe q a W L6 OXO sn oyerusouog SM V 2 9Z TOYSEAM PTTYSPUTM UNJUd 6172191070N qUROLIQN T IXY Te NOYIUAS OFT MGL E191070 1 5 yg IPS squid 0 g a Ieay umud 06 M08 PNI ole Je3y AVS 61 28191010N ping pomnbed se TM Joysem PI9TYSPUTM CMO ping oxe oy V c6T9GINISM T OVTMSL AX SLUF AT on LV a a F or PIN Uorssrursue NTID 0OT LX ol JON 4 6 ET oneuromy A eNOOYAN ALV A eNOOYAN 110413591 UO XVW pmy Suee s 1aMog WO GiLX oYLIIIOJON pue NIN Us9Mog TURBO X90 J pue Suryerjoueg SI9PUNAI Joo 17219101ON syoe1 yeas H E6GOJTW ASA 9st913 UMYT pue asury 100p 194 yuojeamb9 10 GTX 10 p 9X sg r osodung UMmN Jeng s gejd 19NUNS s9yo9Tel S9BUTJ p104 ogumu Ied pIo 9 10 ozu zad pIo a 263 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Crown Victoria cro USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SopXB kod YOrT uoToeA JO Yor 9y9Jdulo9 10J Y STTOZIWALSA uoryeogroods pio SuUTeour yuafeambo 10 E TX JoyIpojN UOMO SANIPP
318. t AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The air suspension system is designed to improve ride handling and general vehicle performance during e Certain road conditions e Steering maneuvers e Braking e Accelerations This system keeps the rear of your vehicle at a constant level by automatically adding air or releasing air from the springs 182 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving If you exceed the load limit the rear air suspension may not operate The air suspension shut off switch is located on the left side of the trunk aki If this switch is in the off position INTERRUPTEUR DE the rear air suspension will not LA SUSPENSION operate PNEUMATIQUE WARNING To prevent sudden vehicle movement turn off air suspen sion switch prior to jacking hoisting or towing vehicle AVERTISSEMENT Pour pr venir tout mouvement soudain du v hi cule placer l arr t l interrupteur de la suspension pneumatique avant de lever le v hicule cric ou pont l vateur ou de le remorquer L WARNING On vehicles equipped with air suspension turn off the air suspension switch prior to jacking hoisting or towing your vehicle OFF ARRET Normal vehicle operation does not reguire any action by the driver TRACTION LOK AXLE IF EQUIPPED This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface
319. t and push in the new bulb 3 Install the bulb socket in trunk lid by turning clockwise Replacing high mount brakelamp bulbs 1 Remove two screws from the lamp assembly 2 Carefully lift the lamp assembly up for access to the bulbs 3 Carefully pull the bulb socket out of the lamp assembly 4 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb To install reverse the removal procedure 62 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end v of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Windshield washer Press the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e a quick press and hold the wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid e along press and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to five seconds Courtesy wipe feature One extra wipe will happen a few seconds after washing the front window to clear any water that is dripping down from the top of the windshield caused by the washing Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and
320. t economy Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy When your vehicle is not moving this function shows one or no bars illuminated Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset TIMER Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time To operate do the following 1 Press and release RESET in order to start the timer 21 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 2 Press and release RESET to pause the timer 3 Press and hold RESET until the timer resets System Check and Vehicle Feature Customization Press the SETUP button repeatedly to cycle the message center through the following features listed DE AE Press SELECT to select functions in the setup menu PRESS SELECT TO BEGIN SYSTEM CHECK When this message appears press SELECT and the message center will begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a status of the item if needed Note Some systems show a message only if a condition is present 1 OIL LIFE HOLD RESET IF NEW OIL 2 WASHER FLUID 3 AIR SUSPENSION if equipped 4 RECONFIGURABLE TELLTALES k FAILED RED FAILED AMBER SCREEN FORM Press SELECT to change the display e ODOMETER e SPEEDO TEXT SIZE Press SELECT to change the display text size e NORMAL e LARGE 22 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster UNITS Displays the current units English
321. t of the seat areas that may come in contact with a deploying airbag Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury WARNING Dash tunnel or console mounted equipment should not be placed outside of the specified zone Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury WARNING Do not mount equipment between the side of front seat to the door trim to block deployment of the side airbag Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury Some approximate dimensions for airbags at full inflation are provided in Figures 1 through 5 These dimensions are somewhat flexible and represent free form deployments without the loading of occupants The 288 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty shaded areas in Figures 6 through 8 represent available police equipment mounting zones These zones are shown for police vehicles equipped with standard bucket seats While bench seats are optional and still appropriate for vehicles with certain limited police equipment requirements the standard bucket seats are recommended for vehicles that require maximum available space for police equipment mounting The zone dimensions provided in Figures 6 through 8 are approximate and will vary with the loading of occupants in the seats All airbag and equipment mounting zone dimensions are approximate due to different airbag deployment characteristics
322. tact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states 212 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable expr
323. te If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure 144 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For full size and dissimilar spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges TIRE CARE Inspecting you
324. te functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer and driver only 150 lb 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNING Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury 166 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the dr
325. the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 130 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1 inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST Installing child safety seats in the lap belt seating positions WARNING Installing a child safety seat in the front row lap seating position should be avoided if at all possible WARNING Never place a rear facing child seat in the front center seating position of a vehicle with rear seating positions WARNING Front seating positions only If seating two adults and a child Ford recommends properly restraining the child in the center front seating position but only if doing so will not interfere with driving the vehicle This arrangement provides lap and shoulder belt and
326. the ignition and performing one of the following actions e Pressing the manual lock button on the door e Operating the remote entry transmitter if equipped e Operating the keyless entry keypad if equipped e Operating the driver s door with a key Autolock if equipped This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when e all doors are closed e the engine is running e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle s speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h Autorelock The autolock feature repeats when e a door is opened and closed while the engine is running e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle s speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h 72 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Autounlock The autounlock feature will unlock all doors when e the ignition has been in the on position all doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h e the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the accessory or off position and the driver door is opened within 10 minutes after the ignition was transitioned to the accessory or off position Note The vehicle doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been electronically locked prior to the driver door being opened Deactivating activating the autolock or autounlock feature Automatic d
327. the trailer is on the tongue 168 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Contact your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps Driving while you tow When towing a trailer e Do not drive faster than 70 mph 113 km h during the first 500 miles 800 km of trailer towing and don t
328. the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A in the U S or Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC 37 A B D or F in Canada available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may cause damage t
329. tical components Ford ESP is honored by all Ford Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in the U S and Canada It s the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get e Reliable quality service anywhere you go e Factory trained technicians e Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Parts Rental car reimbursement If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage including Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs or manufacturer s recalls Transferable coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you re ready to sell your car prospective buyers may feel better about taking a risk on your used vehicle Ford ESP may add resale value Plus exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance including e Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts e Out of fuel and lock out assistance e Travel expense reimbursement for lodging meals and rental car e Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation 300 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford ESP Service Contract With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair c
330. tion e Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool until the appropriate fill level is obtained If coolant is filled to the COLD FILL RANGE or FULL COLD level when the engine is not cool the system will remain underfilled 236 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield e DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle Make sure the correct coolant is used DO NOT
331. tion from 1 off to the 3 on position maintain ignition in 3 on for at least one second This step will program your new key 6 To program additional new unprogrammed key s wait at least 20 seconds and repeat this procedure from Step 1 If successful the new coded key s will start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out If not successful the new coded key s will not start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will flash on and off You may repeat Steps 1 through 6 If failure repeats bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new spare key s programmed 86 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING Adjustable head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are vertically adjustable WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion The adjustable head restraints consist of e a trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure 1 e two steel stems 2 e a guide sleeve adjust release button 3 e and a guide sleeve unlock remove button 4 To adjust the head restraint do the following
332. tion for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS fg Important safety precautions WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others WARNING If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in serious personal injury WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent 241 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before fueling e Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fue
333. tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 147 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is re
334. tive Under normal operating conditions brake dust may accumulate on the wheels Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise The use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations can lead to more dust than in the past Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with soapy water and a soft sponge Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A Anti lock brake system ABS This vehicle is equipped with an anti lock braking system ABS A noise from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be observed during ABS braking events Pedal pulsation coupled with noise while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel bumps wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle s anti lock brake system If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer The ABS operates by detecting the onset of wheel lockup during brake applications and compensates for this tendency The wheels are prevented from locking even when the brakes are firmly applied The accompanying illustration depicts the advantage of an ABS equipped 178 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving vehicle on bottom to a non ABS equipped vehicle on top during hard braki
335. tline pattern with recommended fastener mounting locations in the trunk The guide can be found in the Police Interceptor Modifier Guide and on the Internet at www fleet ford com e Trunk packing considerations the following guidelines are offered to reduce the risk of unique police equipment items pushing through the fuel tank and or back seat see our www fleet ford com website for more details 282 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Crown Victoria Severe Duty Trunk packing considerations A slogan has been developed to increase police agency awareness of the importance of trunk packing LOAD SAFE L Lateral S Soft O Orientation A and A and F Fixed D Direction E Equipment Equipment categories and placement It is recognized that a wide variety of equipment is carried in the trunks of police vehicles as noted above This section addresses the inherent risks of various types of equipment in the event of a high speed rear impact This information is divided into three categories e Carrying not recommended e Carry with caution e Low risk items WARNING Carrying not recommended The following items have been observed in police vehicles and should not be transported in a vehicle trunk containers with gasoline loose ammunition loose flares loose fire extinguisher s loose 4 point lug wrench loose crowbars loose axes and other loose equipment with potential puncture capability
336. tomatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 103 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING After any vehicle collision the safety belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function WARNING BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy management feature e This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision e The energy management feature is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is an 8 inch 20 cm safet
337. tral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position Overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission P RN P 21 operates in gears one through four Overdrive can be deactivated by pressing the transmission control switch on the gearshift lever F The transmission control indicator o D light TCIL will iluminate on the instrument cluster OFF Drive not shown Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed e This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive e O D OFF lamp is illuminated e Provides engine braking e Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O D to other gears Examples hilly terrain heavy loads trailer towing and when engine braking is required 185 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e To return to O D overdrive mode press the transmission control switch The O D OFF lamp will not be illuminated e O D Overdrive is automatically returned each time the key is turned off 2 Second This position allows for second gear only e Provides engine braking e Use to start up on slippery roads e To return to Overdrive move the gearshift lever into the Overdrive position e Selecting 2 Second at higher speeds will cause the transmission to downshift to sec
338. ty of console features These include e Utility compartment e Power point inside storage bin e Cupholders e Air vents to the rear seating positions heat only WARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12V DC Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty The auxiliary power point is located under the cup holder and ashtray drawer in the center stack The auxiliary power point for five passenger vehicles is located in the floor console storage bin Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12V DC 180W If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working a fuse may have blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is required to be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e do n
339. ualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your Ford or Lincoln Mercury Dealership Your vehicle s oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub systems during scheduled maintenance It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford approved flushing chemical Genuine Ford parts and service When planning your maintenance services consider your Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership for all your vehicle s needs Get the most from your service and maintenance visits There are a lot of reasons why visiting your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership for all your service needs is a great way to help keep your vehicle running great Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient How s that for quality service Factory trained technicians Ford and Lincoln Mercury service technicians participate in extensive factory sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealerships stock Ford and Motorcraft branded replacement parts These parts meet or exceed For
340. ubber components to swell break down or become brittle and crack especially when mixed with gasoline Special materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers WARNING Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable If your vehicle is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container 243 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Refueling WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicl
341. ubricate U joints required See axle maintenance items under Exceptions Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Rotate tires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or Change engine oil and replace oil filter 6 months Inspect and lubricate U joints Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid not required on 6R80 transmission Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km Change manual transmission fluid 316 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Extensive idling and or low speed driving for long distances as in heavy commercial use such as delivery taxi patrol car or livery Inspect frequently service as Replace cabin air filter if equipped required Replace engine air filter Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Inspect brake system Rotate tires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if equipped with grease fittings Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or Inspect and lubricate U joints 6 months Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Change engine oil and replace oil filter 6 months or 200 hours of engine operation Every 15 000 miles 24 000 km Repla
342. uddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers In addition the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly If this occurs let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner Automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt When to use the automatic locking mode This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter 102 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How to use the automatic locking mode e Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt e Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out e Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to disengage the au
343. ule PCM includes logic to electronically prevent powertrain overspeed in any transmission selector position IDLE METER Your vehicle may be equipped with an idle meter to indicate how much time the vehicle is idling in P Park or N Neutral The meter is incorporated with the vehicle odometer Pressing the odometer reset button once will display the trip odometer miles followed by a T for trip odometer Pressing the odometer reset button a second time will display the idle meter hours followed by an h for hours The idle meter only accumulates time when the vehicle is in P Park or N Neutral Displayed time is cumulative for the vehicle It cannot be reset to zero Police Fleet vehicles often experience long periods of idling during which engine oil will continue to break down but mileage is not accumulated on the odometer To assist fleet managers in maintaining proper oil change intervals the idle meter will help determine when an oil change is required For every hour that the vehicle idles it has accumulated the equivalent of approximately 33 miles 53 km of driving Using the combination of the vehicle odometer and idle meter allows the fleet manager to better determine when the oil needs to be changed Example When the odometer has accumulated 3 000 miles 4 828 km and the idle meter shows 61 hours a 5 000 mile 8047 km oil change interval will have been reached 3 000 road miles 61 idle hours x 33 miles id
344. urb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload 162 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there i
345. vehicle when using snow tires and chains Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains e If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle e Use only cable type chains offered by Ford Motor Company as an accessory or equivalent Using SAE Class S or other conventional link type chains may cause damage to the vehicle s wheel house and or body e Install chains securely verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h with tire cables on your vehicle e Drive cautiously If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle stop and retighten the chains If this does not work remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle e Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed Do not use tire chains on dry roads 161 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base C
346. vice or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws 1 CD slot Insert a CD label side up With the ignition on the radio will begin play when a CD is inserted If the ignition is off press CD prior to inserting a disc Do not force a disc into the system as damage could result 2 SEEK Press to access the next D or previous gg radio station or CD track Press and hold to advance reverse in the current CD track 28 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 3 TUNE Press to manually go up rs P gt or down lt q the radio frequency 4 MUTE Press to mute the playing mre media Press again to return to the playing media or turn the volume control to adjust the volume 5 Eject Press to eject the CD If a the disc is not removed within the allotted time the system will automatically reload the CD and begin play Note The eject function will work when the ignition is turned off 6 BASS Press BASS then press amp SEL P to 4 decrease increase the level of bass output TREB Treble Press TREB then press A SEL gt to decrease increase the level of treble ine output 7 BAL Balance Press BAL then press lt SEL gt to shift sound to the
347. w system follow these steps to add engine coolant WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly 237 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a translucent plastic bottle Slowly turn cap counterclockwise left until pressure begins to release 3 Step back while the pressure releases 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 prote
348. y and tone will return within 10 minutes or 10 miles 16 km DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected AVERAGE FUEL XX X MPG L 100km Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles gallon or liters 100 km If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing gallons of fuel used by 100 miles traveled kilometers traveled by liters used your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the RESET control press and hold RESET for two seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings FUEL ECONOMY MPG L ikm 4 This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from poor economy to excellen
349. y belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611022 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso 104 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Front safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments for the driver and front outboard passenger Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To lower the shoulder belt height press the button and slide the height adjuster down To raise the height of the shoulder belt press the button and slide the height a adjuster up Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety belt warning light and indicator chime A The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind
350. you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Ford International Business Development Inc Customer Assistance Center P O Box 11957 Caparra Heights Station San Juan Puerto Rico 00922 1957 Telephone 800 841 FORD 3673 FAX 813 390 0804 Email prcac ford com If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Ford Middle East Customer Relationship Center P O Box 21470 Dubai United Arab Emirates Telephone 971 4 3326084 FAX 971 4 3327299 Email menacac ford com www me ford com If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations 216 2011 Crown Victoria cro Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or to order a free publ

Ford 2011 Crown Victoria Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents